JP5583730B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable.

  A slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels having a plurality of types of symbols as identification information drawn on the outer periphery, and each reel has a start lever by a player. The rotation is started by the operation, and the rotation is stopped by the player operating the stop button provided corresponding to each reel. When all reels stop rotating, a winning combination is generated when a predetermined winning symbol combination (for example, 7-7-7, hereinafter referred to as a symbol combination) is arranged on the winning line. To do.

  In this type of slot machine, an internal lottery that determines whether or not winnings are allowed at the same time as the start operation is performed, and on the condition that one of the prizes is won in this internal lottery, a combination of winning symbols Can be controlled to match the winning line.

  In addition, when a specific win is won in the internal lottery, a stop order lottery is selected to select a stop order as a winning condition from a plurality of different reel stop orders, and the stop order selected in this stop order lottery matches the stop order. On condition that each reel is stopped in the stop order, a specific winning prize won in the internal lottery can be generated, and the stop operation of each reel is performed in a stop order different from the stop order won in the stop order lottery. If it is done, even if a specific prize is won in the internal lottery, this specific prize cannot be generated, and when the specific prize is won, the stop order won in the stop order lottery is notified. A slot machine has been proposed in which the player's advantage is changed depending on whether or not it is played (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2003-236041 A

  It is an object of the present invention to provide a slot machine that derives different display results depending on the order of derivation operations.

In order to solve the above-described problem, a slot machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
A variable display device capable of deriving a display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable,
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and one game can be obtained by deriving the display result in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine that is capable of generating a winning according to a combination of symbols on a predetermined winning line among the display results derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas as a result of one game,
Pre-determining means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings before a display result is derived in the variable display area;
Derivation operation means operated when deriving a display result in the variable display area;
Derivation control means for performing control to derive the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated;
With
The determination result of the prior determination means is
A first specific result for simultaneously determining whether the first winning is permitted and the second winning is permitted;
A second specific result for simultaneously determining whether to allow the occurrence of the first prize and to allow the occurrence of the third prize;
Including
The derivation control means includes
When the determination result of the pre-determining means becomes the first specific result, the display result is not yet derived in any of the plurality of variable display areas, and first corresponds to the specific variable display area When the derivation operating means is operated, the variable that the display result has not yet been derived after the symbols constituting the first combination for generating the first winning are derived on the predetermined winning line. Regardless of the timing at which the derivation operation means corresponding to the display area is operated, the first combination is derived on the predetermined pay line, while the display result is not yet derived in any of the variable display areas. When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area other than the specific variable display area is first operated in the state, the second combination for generating the second prize is selected. After the symbols to be formed are derived on the predetermined winning line, the timing at which the deriving operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived has been operated derives the symbols constituting the second combination If the timing is possible, the second combination is derived on the predetermined winning line, and any symbol other than the timing at which the symbols constituting the second combination can be derived is not generated. A combination is derived on the predetermined winning line;
When the determination result of the pre-decision means becomes the second specific result, the display result is not yet derived in any of the plurality of variable display areas, and the specific variable display area is first displayed. When the corresponding derivation operation means is operated, the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived after the symbols constituting the first combination are derived on the predetermined winning line. Regardless of the timing at which the first variable is operated, the first combination is derived on the predetermined pay line, while the specific variable is first displayed in a state where the display result has not yet been derived in any of the variable display areas. When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area other than the display area is operated, the symbols constituting the third combination for generating the third prize are displayed as the predetermined combination. If the timing at which the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived has been operated after being derived on the award line is the timing at which the symbols constituting the third combination can be derived If the third combination is derived on the predetermined winning line, and the symbol constituting the third combination is a timing other than the timing at which the symbol can be derived, a combination of symbols that does not generate any winning is the predetermined winning line. Derived above,
The timing at which the symbol constituting the second combination can be derived is different from the timing at which the symbol constituting the third combination can be derived,
The slot machine has an operation mode for deriving the first combination of the first combination or the second combination when the determination result of the predetermination means becomes the first specific result. An operation mode in which notification is possible and the first combination or the third combination is derived from the first combination even when the determination result of the prior determination unit becomes the second specific result. Further comprising an operation mode notifying means capable of notifying
It is characterized by that.
The slot machine according to means 1 of the present invention is:
A plurality of variable display areas (left, middle, and right reels) including at least a first variable display area (left reel) and a second variable display area (right reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can each be identified ) Each having a variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of deriving a display result,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and display results are derived to all of the plurality of variable display areas (left, middle, and right reels). As a result, one game is completed, and a winning can be generated according to a combination of symbols derived on a predetermined winning line (winning line L) as a display result derived in the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine (slot machine 1),
Whether or not to allow the generation of a plurality of types of winnings including a small role winning (small role) with awarding of the game value (medal) before the display result of at least one variable display area is derived. Predetermining means to determine (internal lottery),
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results of the plurality of variable display areas (left, middle, right reel);
When the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated, the display result in the variable display area (left, middle, right reel) according to the determination result of the advance determination means (internal lottery) When the first operation corresponding to the first variable display area (left reel) is performed (the left reel stop operation). When the display result is derived to the left reel) and the second operation (stop operation of the right reel) corresponding to the second variable display area (right reel) is performed, the second variable display area (right reel) A deriving control means for deriving the display result to the reel),
With
The pre-determining means includes
On the one winning line (winning line L), the first symbol (black 7) is derived in the first variable display area (left reel), and the second symbol (black reel) in the second variable display area (right reel). The first variable is allowed on the one winning line (winning line L) and the fact that the first small role winning (15 sheets (1)) to be won is allowed on condition that the (bell) is derived. A third symbol (bell) different from the first symbol is derived in the display area (left reel), and a fourth symbol (replay) different from the second symbol is derived in the second variable display area (right reel). A first simultaneous determination (small role GR (1)) that simultaneously determines that the second small role winning (15 sheets (A)) to be awarded on the condition is allowed to be generated,
On the first winning line (winning line L), the first variable display area (left reel) has a fifth symbol (net 7 /) different from the first symbol (black 7) and the third symbol (bell). White 7 / BAR) is derived, and the third small part winning (15 sheets (2) is obtained on the condition that the second symbol (bell) is derived to the second variable display area (right reel). ) / (3) / (4)) and the second simultaneous determination for simultaneously determining whether the second small role winning (15 sheets (A)) is allowed to occur ( Small role GR (2) / (3) / (4)),
On one winning line (winning line L), a sixth symbol (black 7) is derived in the second variable display area (right reel), and a seventh symbol (black reel) is displayed in the first variable display area (left reel). And the second variable on the one winning line (winning line L), and the fact that the fourth small role winning (15 sheets (9)) to be won is permitted on the condition that An eighth symbol (bell) different from the sixth symbol is derived in the display area (right reel), and a ninth symbol (replay) different from the seventh symbol is derived in the first variable display area (left reel). A third simultaneous determination (small role GR (9)) for simultaneously determining that the fifth small role winning (15 sheets (C)) that will be awarded on the condition is allowed,
10 symbols (net 7 / white) different from the 6 symbols (black 7) and 8 symbols (bell) in the second variable display area (right reel) on one winning line (winning line L) 7 / BAR) is derived, and the sixth small part winning (15 sheets (10)) is awarded on condition that the seventh symbol (bell) is derived in the first variable display area (left reel). / (11) / (12)) and the fourth simultaneous determination (small role GR (10) / () that simultaneously determines whether the fifth small role winning is permitted. 11) / (12)),
Are possible,
The derivation control means includes
First derivation control means for performing control for deriving a display result on the variable display area (left, middle, right reel) when the first simultaneous determination (small role GR (1)) is made;
When the second simultaneous determination (small role GR (2) / (3) / (4)) is made, the variable display area (left, middle, right reel) performs control for deriving a display result. Two derivation control means;
Third derivation control means for performing control for deriving a display result to the variable display area (left, middle, right reel) when the third simultaneous determination (small role GR (9)) is made;
When the fourth simultaneous determination (small role GR (10) / (11) / (12)) is made, control is performed to derive a display result in the variable display area (left, middle, right reel). 4 derivation control means;
Including
The first derivation control means includes
When the first operation (left reel stop operation) is performed in a state where no display result is derived in any of the plurality of variable display areas (left, middle, and right reels), the first operation is performed. Regardless of the timing, the third symbol (bell) is derived on the winning line (winning line L),
When the second operation (stop operation of the right reel) is performed after the third symbol (bell) is derived on the winning line (winning line L) of the first variable display area (left reel). Regardless of the timing of the second operation, the fourth symbol (replay) is derived on the winning line from which the third symbol (bell) is derived,
When the second operation (right reel stop operation) is performed in a state where display results are not derived for any of the plurality of variable display areas (left, middle, and right reels), the second operation is performed. Regardless of the timing, only the second symbol (bell) of the second and fourth symbols (bell, replay) is derived on the winning line (winning line L),
After the second symbol (bell) is derived on the winning line (winning line L) in the second variable display area (right reel), the first operation (left reel stop operation) is the first timing. If it is made at (timing of the drawing range of black 7), the first symbol (black 7) is derived on the winning line (winning line L) where the second symbol (bell) is stopped, When the first operation (the left reel stop operation) is performed at a timing different from the first timing (a timing outside the black 7 pull-in range), the second symbol (bell) is stopped. A symbol that does not constitute a winning along with the second symbol (bell) on the winning line (winning line L) is derived,
The second derivation control means includes
When the first operation (left reel stop operation) is performed in a state where no display result is derived in any of the plurality of variable display areas (left, middle, and right reels), the first operation is performed. Regardless of the timing, the third symbol (bell) is derived on the winning line (winning line L),
When the second operation (stop operation of the right reel) is performed after the third symbol (bell) is derived on the winning line (winning line L) of the first variable display area (left reel). Regardless of the timing of the second operation, the fourth symbol (replay) is derived on the winning line (winning line L) from which the third symbol (bell) is derived,
When the second operation (right reel stop operation) is performed in a state where display results are not derived for any of the plurality of variable display areas (left, middle, and right reels), the second operation is performed. Regardless of the timing, only the second symbol (bell) of the second and fourth symbols (bell, replay) is derived on the winning line (winning line L),
After the second symbol (bell) is derived on the winning line (winning line L) of the second variable display area (right reel), the first operation (stop operation of the left reel) is performed by the first reel. When it is made at a second timing (net 7 / white 7 / BAR drawing range timing) different from the timing, the second symbol (bell) is stopped on the winning line (winning line L). The fifth symbol (net 7 / white 7 / BAR) is derived, and the first operation (stop operation of the left reel) is different from the second timing (net 7 / white 7 / BAR pull-in range) The second symbol (bell) on the winning line (winning line L), the symbol that does not constitute a prize with the second symbol (bell) is derived,
The third derivation control means includes
When the second operation (right reel stop operation) is performed in a state where display results are not derived for any of the plurality of variable display areas (left, middle, and right reels), the second operation is performed. Regardless of the timing, the eighth symbol (bell) is derived on the winning line (winning line L),
When the first operation (stop operation of the left reel) is performed after the eighth symbol (bell) is derived on the winning line (winning line L) of the second variable display area (right reel). Regardless of the timing of the first operation, the ninth symbol (replay) is derived on the winning line (winning line L) from which the eighth symbol (bell) is derived,
When the first operation (left reel stop operation) is performed in a state where no display result is derived in any of the plurality of variable display areas (left, middle, and right reels), the first operation is performed. Regardless of the timing, only the seventh symbol (bell) of the seventh and ninth symbols (bell, replay) is derived on the winning line (winning line L),
After the seventh symbol (bell) is derived on the winning line (winning line L) in the first variable display area (left reel), the second operation (right reel stop operation) is the third timing. If it is made at (timing of black 7 drawing range), the sixth symbol (black 7) is derived on the winning line (winning line L) where the seventh symbol (bell) is stopped, When the second operation (stop operation of the right reel) is performed at a timing (timing outside the pull-in range of black 7) different from the third timing, the seventh symbol (bell) is stopped. A symbol that does not constitute a winning along with the seventh symbol (bell) on the winning line (winning line L) is derived,
The fourth derivation control means includes:
When the second operation (right reel stop operation) is performed in a state where display results are not derived for any of the plurality of variable display areas (left, middle, and right reels), the second operation is performed. Regardless of the timing, the eighth symbol (bell) is derived on the winning line (winning line L),
When the first operation (stop operation of the left reel) is performed after the eighth symbol (bell) is derived on the winning line (winning line L) of the second variable display area (right reel). Regardless of the timing of the first operation, the ninth symbol (replay) is derived on the winning line (winning line L) from which the eighth symbol (bell) is derived,
When the first operation (left reel stop operation) is performed in a state where no display result is derived in any of the plurality of variable display areas (left, middle, and right reels), the first operation is performed. Regardless of the timing, only the seventh symbol (bell) of the seventh and ninth symbols (bell, replay) is derived on the winning line (winning line L),
After the seventh symbol (bell) is derived on the winning line (winning line L) of the first variable display area (left reel), the second operation (right reel stop operation) is performed by the third reel. If the timing is a fourth timing different from the timing (the timing of the net 7 / white 7 / BAR draw-in range), the seventh symbol (bell) is stopped on the winning line (winning line L). The 10th symbol (net 7 / white 7 / BAR) is derived, and the second operation (right reel stop operation) is different from the fourth timing (net 7 / white 7 / BAR pull-in range) If the timing is outside (time)), a symbol that does not constitute a prize along with the seventh symbol (bell) is derived on the winning line (winning line L) where the seventh symbol (bell) is stopped,
The slot machine has the first simultaneous determination (small role GR (1)) or the second simultaneous determination (small role GR () in a state where display results are not derived for any of the plurality of variable display areas. 2) / (3) / (4)) is performed, the first operation (left reel stop operation) is prompted, and the third simultaneous determination (small role GR (9)) or the fourth When the simultaneous determination (the small combination GR (10) / (11) / (12)) is made, the small combination allowable derivation operation notification (stop order notification) that prompts the second operation (stop operation of the right reel) is performed. It is characterized in that it comprises a small role allowing time deriving operation notification means.
According to this feature, when the first simultaneous determination is made, when the first variable display area is first derived in a state where no display result is derived for any of the plurality of variable display areas, When the first variable display area is derived first, the second small role winning is always generated regardless of the timing of the derivation operation of the first variable display area and the second variable display area. The first small role winning occurs only when the first variable display area derivation operation is performed at the first timing, and when the timing is different from the first timing, any winning is performed. It does not occur.
In addition, when the second simultaneous determination is made, when the first variable display area is first derived in a state where no display result is derived for any of the plurality of variable display areas, Regardless of the timing of the derivation operation for the variable display area and the second variable display area, the second small winning combination always occurs, but when the derivation operation for the second variable display area is performed first, When the derivation operation of one variable display area is performed at a second timing different from the first timing, the third small part winning is generated, and when the timing is different from the second timing, any No winnings will occur.
In addition, when the third simultaneous determination is made, if the second variable display area is first derived in the state where the display result is not derived for any of the plurality of variable display areas, Regardless of the timing of the derivation operation of the variable display area and the second variable display area, the fifth small role winning always occurs, but when the derivation operation of the first variable display area is performed first, Only when the derivation operation of the second variable display area is performed at the third timing, the fourth small winning combination is generated, and when it is performed at a timing different from the third timing, any winning may be generated. Absent.
In addition, when the fourth simultaneous determination is made, if the derivation operation of the second variable display area is first performed in a state in which the display result is not derived for any of the plurality of variable display areas, Regardless of the timing of the derivation operation of the variable display area and the second variable display area, the fifth small role winning always occurs, but when the derivation operation of the first variable display area is performed first, The sixth small role winning is generated only when the derivation operation of the variable display area of 2 is performed at the fourth timing different from the third timing, and any of the cases when the timing is different from the fourth timing is selected. There will be no winnings.
As described above, the order of the derivation operations that can always generate the small role winning is different between the case where the first and second simultaneous determinations are made and the case where the third and fourth simultaneous determinations are made. In addition, in the case where the first simultaneous determination is made and the second simultaneous determination is made and the first variable display region is first derived, in the first variable display region, When the timing of the derivation operation as a condition for generating the small role winning is different and the third simultaneous determination is made and the fourth simultaneous determination is made, the derivation operation of the first variable display area is first performed. Since the timing of the derivation operation, which is a condition for generating a small role winning in the second variable display area, is different in the case where the determination is made, which of the first to fourth simultaneous determination results is determined by the prior determination means The player If you can not constant, it is impossible to perform the derivation operation in the order that it becomes possible to generate the always small role prize, it can not also be generated reliably small role prize when performing the derivation operation in a different order. For this reason, in the state where the display result is not derived for any of the plurality of variable display areas, the derivation operation of the variable display area that can surely generate the small role winning according to the determination result of the predetermining means is urged. It is possible to change the rate at which a small role winning is generated depending on whether or not a small role allowable derivation operation notification is made.
In addition, when the determination result of the pre-decision means is the first to fourth simultaneous determinations and the derivation operation is performed in an order that makes it possible to always generate the small part winnings, The fifth small part winning always occurs, and the first, third, fourth, and sixth small part winnings allowed at the same time as the second small part winning or the fifth small part winning are never generated. In other words, if the derivation operation is performed in the order in which it is always possible to generate the small role winnings, the order of the derivation operations is selected without changing the small role winnings generated by the technical intervention of the player. Even simple technical interventions do not change the value gained by further technical interventions, so fairness can be maintained even among players of different skill levels.
In addition, since the order of the derivation operations that can always generate the small role winning from a plurality of different orders is determined only by the pre-determining means that determines whether or not the winning is allowed, these derivation operations The control for determining the order of the game is not complicated, and the result of the game is not influenced by the lottery result other than the pre-determining means, so there is no possibility of harming the fairness of the game.

Note that the predetermined number of bets is at least one bet number, and a game can be started by setting a bet number of two or more or setting a maximum bet number. good. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet amount determined according to a plurality of game states.
Further, the first symbol may be different from the third symbol and the fifth symbol, and may be the same as the second symbol, the fourth symbol, and the sixth to tenth symbols. The second symbol may be different from the fourth symbol, and may be the same as the first symbol, the third symbol, and the fifth to tenth symbols. The third symbol only needs to be different from the first symbol and the fifth symbol, and may be the same as the second symbol, the fourth symbol, and the sixth to tenth symbols. The fourth symbol may be different from the second symbol, and may be the same as the first symbol, the third symbol, and the fifth to tenth symbols. The fifth symbol may be different from the first symbol and the third symbol, and may be the same as the second symbol, the fourth symbol, and the sixth to tenth symbols.
Similarly, the sixth symbol only needs to be different from the eighth symbol and the tenth symbol, and may be the same as the first to fifth symbols, the seventh symbol, and the ninth symbol. The 7th symbol may be different from the 9th symbol and may be the same as the 1st to 6th symbols, the 8th symbol, and the 10th symbol. The eighth symbol only needs to be different from the sixth symbol and the tenth symbol, and may be the same as the first to fifth symbols, the seventh symbol, and the ninth symbol. It may be the same as the 9th symbol. The 9th symbol may be different from the 7th symbol, and may be the same as the 1st to 6th symbols, the 8th symbol, and the 10th symbol. The 10th symbol may be different from the 6th and 8th symbols, and may be the same as the 1st to 5th symbols, the 7th symbol, and the 9th symbol.
Further, the first timing may be any timing different from the second timing, and the second timing may be any timing different from the first timing.
Further, the third timing may be any timing different from the fourth timing, and the fourth timing may be any timing different from the third timing.
The winning line may be single or plural as long as the derivation control by the derivation control means is possible.

The slot machine according to means 2 of the present invention is the slot machine according to means 1,
The first to sixth small role winnings (15 (1) to (12), 15 (A) to (C)) are the same number (15) of game value (medal when the winning occurs, respectively. ) Is characterized by a prize.
According to this feature, when the second small role winning is less in gaming value than the first small winning combination and the third small winning combination, the fifth small winning combination is the fourth small winning combination. The first operation is first performed when any of the first to fourth simultaneous determinations is made as compared to the case where the game value given is less than the winning and the sixth small part winning. Since there is a large difference between the expected value of the game value given when the second operation is performed and the expected value of the game value given when the second operation is first performed, the operation notification derived when the small role is permitted Depending on whether or not is made, not only does the rate of occurrence of small winnings change, but also the expected value of game value to be given can be greatly changed.

The slot machine according to means 3 of the present invention is the slot machine according to means 1 or 2,
Allowing the occurrence of a re-game prize (re-game player) accompanied by a re-game (re-play game) that can be played without using the game value (medal) by the pre-determining means (internal lottery) A re-gaming high probability state control means for controlling to a re-gaming high probability state (RT) in which the probability of being determined to be higher than the normal gaming state;
The small role allowable time derivation operation notification means performs the small role allowable time derivation operation notification (stop order notification) in the replay high probability state (RT).
According to this feature, in the replay high probability state, the player does not need to perform a derivation operation (so-called push) with an operation timing in order to generate a small role winning, and the game in the replay high probability state Since the digestion speed can be increased, the operation of the slot machine can be increased.

The slot machine according to means 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The pre-determining means (internal lottery) determines that it is allowed to generate a special prize (special part) accompanying a transition to a special gaming state (special part) that is advantageous to the player, and the special prize (special part) ) Does not occur, it has a carry-over means to carry over the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize (special role winning flag) after the next game,
The derivation control means determines whether to allow the occurrence of the small part winning (small part) and to allow the special winning (special part) to occur, and to allow the permitted small part winning (small part) ) And the permitted special winning (special role) structural symbol when the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a timing capable of deriving both. Among the constituent symbols of the small prize winning (small role) and the special winning (special role) constituent symbols, the special winning (special role) constituent symbols are derived to the winning line (winning line L),
The small role allowable derivation operation notification means is in a state where the small combination allowable derivation operation notification (stop) is performed in a state where the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize (a special combination winning flag) is carried over by the carryover means. (Sequential notification).
According to this feature, it is determined that both the occurrence of a small prize winning and the special winning are allowed. When a player's operation is performed at a timing that overlaps with the timing at which derivation is possible, a special prize is generated by performing control that derives the constituent figure of the special prize in preference to the constituent figure of the small part prize. In the state that the decision to allow is carried over, it is decided that the occurrence of the small part winning is permitted, and the small part winning is generated as compared with the case where it is decided that the small part winning is permitted alone. Even if it is difficult to make a small role winning derivation operation notification when any of the first to fourth simultaneous determinations is made, it is difficult to generate a small role winning. Even so Special winnings are generated because it is possible to prevent missed small role winnings from being missed as much as possible by encouraging derivation operations in the order notified by the operation notification and at timings other than the timing at which the constituent symbols of special winnings can be derived. In the state where the decision to allow the player is carried over, it is possible to prevent the player from causing a disadvantage by losing the permitted small role winning.

The slot machine according to means 5 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
Allowing the occurrence of a re-game prize (re-game player) accompanied by a re-game (re-play game) that can be played without using the game value (medal) by the pre-determining means (internal lottery) A re-gaming high probability state control means for controlling to a re-gaming high probability state (RT) in which the probability of being determined to be higher than the normal gaming state;
The pre-determining means includes
Allow the occurrence of the first specific winning (replay (1)) that becomes a winning when the first combination (replay-replay-replay) is derived as a combination of symbols stopped on the winning line (winning line L) And a second specific prize (replay (2)) that is awarded when a second combination (black 7, net 7, white 7, BAR-replay-replay) different from the first combination is derived. To (5)), the fifth simultaneous determination (replay GR (1)) for simultaneously determining
A third combination (replay-replay-black 7, net 7, white 7) different from the first combination and the second combination is permitted to generate the first specific winning (replay (1)). , BAR) is derived, a sixth simultaneous determination (replay GR (3)) that simultaneously determines that the generation of the third specific winning (replay (10) to (13)) that becomes a winning is permitted. ),
The fifth simultaneous determination (replay GR (1)) is made, and the respective derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) corresponding to the plurality of variable display areas (left, middle, right reel) are the first. Are operated in the order (the order in which the middle reel or the right reel is set to the first stop), the first combination (replay / replay / replay) is led to the winning line (winning line L), and the first The second combination (black 7, net 7, white 7, BAR-replay-replay) is selected as the winning line (when the left reel is operated in the first stop order). Winning line L),
The sixth simultaneous determination (replay GR (3)) is made, and the respective derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) corresponding to the plurality of variable display areas (left, middle, right reel) are the second. Are operated in the order of the left reel and the middle reel as the first stop, the first combination (replay / replay / replay) is led to the winning line (winning line L), and the second The third combination (replay-replay-black 7, net 7, white 7, BAR) is changed to the winning line (when the right reel is operated in the first stop order). Winning line L),
The re-playing high probability state control means is configured to output the re-playing height when the first combination (replay / replay / replay) is derived to the winning line (winning line L) in the replaying high probability state (RT). First replay high probability state termination means for terminating the probability state (RT), or the second combination (black 7, net 7, white 7, BAR-replay-replay) in the replay high probability state (RT) Alternatively, when any of the third combinations (replay-replay-black 7, net 7, white 7, BAR) is derived to the winning line (winning line L), the replay high probability state (RT) is set. Including one of the second replay high probability state termination means to terminate,
When the fifth simultaneous decision (replay GR (1)) or the sixth simultaneous decision (replay GR (3)) is made in the replay high probability state (RT), the slot machine Derivation at a specific permissible time prompting the operation of the deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) in the order in which a combination different from the combination of symbols in which the game high probability state ends is stopped on the winning line (winning line L) It is characterized by comprising a specific permissible time derivation operation notification means for performing operation notification (stop order notification).
According to this feature, when the fifth simultaneous determination is made, if the derivation operation is performed in the first order, the first specific winning occurs, and the derivation operation is performed in an order different from the first order. In the case of performing, a second specific prize is generated. On the other hand, when the sixth simultaneous determination is made, if the derivation operation is performed in the second order different from the first order, the first specific winning is generated and the order different from the second order When the derivation operation is performed in step 3, a third specific prize is generated. That is, in the case where the fifth simultaneous determination is made and in the case where the sixth simultaneous determination is made, the order of the derivation operation that causes the first specific winning and the specific winning other than the first specific winning are made. If the player cannot specify whether the order of the derivation operations that cause the occurrence of the difference is different and the determination result of the prior determination means is the fifth simultaneous determination or the sixth simultaneous determination, It is not possible to select and win 3 specific winnings. For this reason, depending on whether or not the derivation operation means to be operated first is notified by the specific permission time derivation operation means notification, the ratio at which the combination of symbols serving as the end condition of the replay high probability state is avoided, that is, It is possible to change the rate at which the high game probability state continues.
Further, the order of the derivation operation in which the first specific prize is generated from a plurality of different orders and the order of the derivation operations in which the specific prize other than the first specific prize is generated allow the generation of the prize. Therefore, the control for determining the order of these derivation operations does not become complicated, and the result of the game depends on the lottery result other than the prior determination means. There is no risk of harming the fairness of the game.

The slot machine according to means 6 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
A game control board (game control board 40) equipped with game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the game;
A gaming electronic component (inserted medal sensor 31) including at least one of a first electronic component that outputs a signal related to the progress of the game and a second electronic component that receives a signal related to the progress of the game;
The gaming electronic component (inserted medal sensor 31) is detachable by connecting the connectors (board side connector 620a and cable side connector 610a / board side connector 621a and cable side connector 611a / board side connector 622g and cable side connector 612g). ) And the game control board (game control board 40) for electrically connecting the game electronic component (inserted medal sensor 31) and the game control board (game control board 40). Wiring (cables 600a, 601g);
The wiring and connectors (board side connector 621a, cable side connector 611a / board side connector 622g, and cable side connector 612g) are connected to each other, and the gaming electronic component (inserted medal sensor 31) and the game control board (game control board) 40) a relay board (operation part relay board 110) for relaying input / output of signals to / from,
The connection between the connectors on the wiring between the game electronic component (the inserted medal sensor 31) and the game control board (game control board 40) is broken, and the release restriction part related to the connection between the connectors is destroyed. Unless otherwise, electronic component connection release restriction means (connector restriction member) that forms a connection release restriction state that makes the release impossible,
With
The electronic component connection release regulating means is
Connector (board side connector 620a and cable side connector 610a / board side connector 621a and cable) of the wiring (cable 600a) between the game control board (game control board 40) and the relay board (operation unit relay board 110) First electronic component connection release restricting means (connector restricting member) that disables the connection between the side connectors 611a),
Connection between the wiring board (cable 601g) and the connector (board side connector 622g and cable side connector 612g) between the relay board (operation unit relay board 110) and the game electronic component (inserted medal sensor 31) is performed. A second electronic component connection release restricting means (connector restricting member) that is unreleasable;
It is characterized by including.
According to this feature, not only the wiring connector between the game control board and the relay board, but also the release of the connection between the wiring connector between the relay board and the gaming electronic component is regulated, The release of the connection between all the connectors of the wiring provided between the game electronic component and the game control board is restricted. As a result, it is difficult to conduct any illegal act such as replacing any connector with a connector such as an unauthorized driving tool and allowing the game control board to input / output illegal signals related to the progress of the game. If the slot machine set in the winning state, especially when multiple types of special winnings with different advantages depending on the winning line, can be determined, It is possible to effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing to a player at the start of business at a game shop.
In addition, since the connection release restriction state is formed by the electronic component connection release restriction means, in order to release the connection between the connectors, the release restriction part must be destroyed, and after this, the connection is released again. Since it becomes extremely difficult to form a connection release restriction state and it takes time and effort, it is possible to more effectively suppress the fraud.
One or more relay boards may be connected between one gaming electronic component and the game control board. When a plurality of relay boards are connected, the electronic component connection release restriction Preferably, the means includes third electronic component connection release restriction means that makes it impossible to release connection between the connectors of the wiring between one relay board and another relay board. The release of the connection between all the connectors of the wiring provided between the game electronic component and the game control board is regulated.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is an internal structure figure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is the schematic which shows the wiring connection state of the game control board and the electronic component for games connected to this game control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of an external output board | substrate. (A) is a timing chart showing the output status of the medal IN signal, and (b) is a timing chart showing the output status of the medal OUT signal. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel motor. (A) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of starting of a reel motor, (b) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of rotation of a reel motor and a stop. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a figure which shows the structure of the combination used as the object of an internal lottery. It is a figure which shows the small combination which wins according to an operation procedure at the time of small combination GR winning. It is a figure which shows the small combination which wins according to an operation procedure at the time of small combination GR winning. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of a question production period (confirmed state) and AT high probability state. It is a figure which shows transition of the difficulty level of question production. It is a figure which shows the display screen of the liquid crystal display in question production. It is a figure which shows an example (picture judgment) of a question effect. It is a figure which shows an example (group judgment) of question production. It is a figure which shows an example (picture memory) of question production. It is a figure which shows an example (amida memory) of a question effect. It is a figure which shows an example (box counting) of question production. It is a figure which shows an example (mole hitting) of question production. It is a figure which shows an example (shuffle) of question production. It is a figure which shows an example (computation code | symbol) of a question effect. It is a figure which shows an example (time calculation) of a question effect. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the bonus production performed when CB (3) or CB (4) wins.

  Examples of the present invention will be described below.

  Embodiment 1 of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is rotatable to a housing 1a having an open front surface and a side end of the housing 1a. The front door 1b is pivotally supported.

  On the back side (inward side) of the front door 1b of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter referred to as left reel, middle reel, and right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. 1) are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. Arranged to be visible.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the outer periphery of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, “black 7”, “net 7 (shaded 7 in the figure)”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “replay”, A plurality of types of mutually distinguishable symbols such as “watermelon” and “bell” are drawn 21 in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated forward by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are directed downward. So that the three continuous symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. It has become.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R (see FIG. 4) for detecting a reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back A reel LED 55 (see FIG. 4) for irradiation is provided. The reel LED 55 includes nine LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be irradiated independently.

A display area of the liquid crystal display 51 is disposed at a substantially central position of the front door 1b. The display area of the liquid crystal display 51 of this embodiment is formed in a size larger than the see-through window 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the display mode displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is larger than the display mode of the reels. The structure is more conspicuous. On the front side (front side in FIG. 1) of the liquid crystal display 51, an instruction (for example, touch operation) from the player to the display surface is detected, and the position (for example, the position where the touch operation is performed) is specified. Light-emitting devices 56a and 56b and light-receiving devices 57a and 57b that constitute a touch panel for the above-described purpose are installed. The light emitting devices 56a and 56b include a plurality of infrared light emitting elements (for example, LEDs). The light receiving devices 57a and 57b include a plurality of infrared light receiving elements (for example, phototransistors).

  The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed in pairs in the horizontal direction across the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed so that infrared rays radiated from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56a can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57a. Similarly, the light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed in pairs in the vertical direction across the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed so that infrared rays emitted from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56b can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57b.

  In the present embodiment, infrared grids are formed along the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 by emitting infrared rays from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. When a touch operation is performed on the display surface by the player, the light receiving devices 57a and 57b detect the shielding of infrared rays and output a signal for specifying the position where the detected light receiving element is arranged. To the touch panel controller 99 described later. The touch panel controller 99 can specify the position where the touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and the touch panel is formed by these. Yes.

  The light emitting devices 56 a and 56 b constituting the touch panel are installed on the left side and the lower side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51, and the light receiving devices 57 a and 57 b are installed on the right side and the upper side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The touch panel can detect a touch operation in an area surrounded by the light emitting devices 56a and 56b and the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and can specify a position where the touch operation is performed.

  On the front door 1b, a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a game value owned by the player) are used for one medal. A single bet switch 5 that is operated when setting the bet number, and using a credit, the maximum bet number (a game in this embodiment) among a specified number of bets determined in accordance with the game state within the range. Regardless of the state, the MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting 3), the medal stored as credit and the medal used for setting the bet amount are settled (the medal used for setting the credit and bet number) Is operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, but are provided operable by the player.

  The front door 1b also displays a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in BB, which will be described later, and an error code that indicates the contents when an error occurs. An auxiliary indicator 12 and a payout indicator 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize are provided.

  Further, on the front door 1b, 1BETLED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set to 1 by lighting, 2BETLED 15 that notifies that the bet number is set to 2, and 3 bets are set. 3BET LED 16 to notify when lit, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted is lit, start valid LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (previous Waiting state LED 19 for informing that it is in the state of waiting for the start of reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the game, during replay informing that it is in the replay game described later An LED 20 is provided.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the setting operation of the betting number by operating the one-sheet BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. Inside the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R for informing that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective by lighting (FIG. 4).

  Inside the front door 1b, reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively (see FIG. 4), a reset switch 23 for detecting an error state described later by a predetermined key operation and a reset operation for releasing a stop state described later, during a setting value change or a setting value confirmation described later. A set value display 24 for displaying the set value at that time, and a flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 on the side of a hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 2) described later provided in the housing 1a or A flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either one of the medal payout outlets 9 side is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, and the hopper tank 34a Medal selector having inserted medal sensor 31 for detecting (not shown), the door opening detection switch 25 for detecting the open state of the front door 1b (see FIG. 4) is provided a medal flowing down to.

  As shown in FIG. 2, an external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, and a hopper tank 34a are stored in the housing 1a. A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals from the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  On the front surface of the power supply box 100 is a stop switch for selecting whether to enable / disable a stop function for controlling the stop state at the end of BB, which will be described later (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed). 36a, automatic checkout for selecting whether the automatic checkout function is effective / invalid for controlling automatic checkout processing (processing for adjusting (returning) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at the end of CB, which will be described later The switch 36b functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to the setting change mode at the time of startup, and as a reset switch for canceling the error state and the stop state in the normal state. In the setting change mode, the winning probability of the internal lottery described later Reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value of (development rate), power ON / OFF Power switch 39 is provided which is operated when that.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the winning line L (see FIG. 1) becomes valid and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the state where the game can be started. Become. In this embodiment, three cards are determined as the prescribed number of bets regardless of the gaming state. In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, only the winning line L set across the symbols arranged in the lower stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is defined as the winning line. In this embodiment, one winning line is used, but a plurality of winning lines may be defined.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is finished, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a combination) on the winning line L is displayed on each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. If the game stops as a result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). On the winning line L, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the gaming state is shifted according to the combination of symbols. .

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic checkout switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101. Yes.

  On the game control board 40, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the insertion medal sensor 31, the door opening detection switch 25, The reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Are connected, and the detection signals of these connected switches are inputted.

Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20 , BET switch effective LED 21, left, middle, right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, set value display 24, flow path switching solenoid 30, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are connected, and via power supply board 101 The above-described hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 controls the game, and random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 16383 in this embodiment). random number generating circuit for generating a 42, a random number generation circuit 42 sampling circuit 43 to obtain the random number, the switch detects the detection signal input from the connected switches directly or via a power supply board 101 to the game controller board 40 detecting Circuit 44, motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of the flow path switching solenoid 30, and various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40 The LED drive circuit 47 that controls the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 When a voltage drop is detected, a power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41, when power is turned on or when an initialization command is not input from the main CPU 41a A reset circuit 49 for giving a reset signal to the main CPU 41a, an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the throwing medal sensor 31, and an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are monitored. The disconnection monitoring IC 50 and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The main CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b, and performs processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the main CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  Further, the main control unit 41 is supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 41c is held while the backup power is being supplied.

  The main CPU 41a executes basic processing that shifts in stages according to the detection state of various switches connected to the game control board 40. Further, the main CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In the present embodiment, the power interruption interrupt process is executed in response to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 48. Further, the main CPU 41a executes a timer interrupt process at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment).

  The main CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to the light receiving devices 57a and 57b constituting the touch panel described above, and detection signals of the connected light receiving devices 57a and 57b are input to the touch panel controller 99.

  Electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), a rendering effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 described above are connected to the rendering control board 90, which is disposed on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. These electric components are driven based on control by a sub-control unit 91 (described later) mounted on the effect control board 90. The effect control board 90 is connected to the light emitting devices 56a and 56b constituting the touch panel described above, and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are based on control by a touch panel controller 99 described later mounted on the effect control board 90. To be driven.

Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and a microcomputer provided with an I / O port 91d. The sub control unit 91 controls the effect, and the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 that performs display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED, an LED driving circuit 93 that performs drive control of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, Supplied to a reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not inputted for a certain period of time, a clock device 97 that outputs time information including date information and time information, and a slot machine 1 The power supply voltage is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, this is indicated Power interruption detecting circuit 98 which outputs a pressure drop signal to the sub-control section 91, the light receiving device 57a, on the basis of the signal from 57 b, the process of identifying the touch-operated position relative to the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51, etc. The sub CPU 91a receives commands sent from the game control board 40 and output information from the touch panel controller 99, and performs various controls for performing effects. And each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90 is controlled directly or indirectly.

  Similar to the main CPU 41a, the sub CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). The sub CPU 91a acquires a command from the main control unit 41 based on an input of a strobe (INT) signal output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command, and performs a command reception interrupt process for storing the command in the reception buffer. Run. In addition, the sub CPU 91a generates an interrupt at regular intervals and executes a timer interrupt process. Further, the sub CPU 91a executes a power interruption interrupt process according to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, various boards such as the game control board 40 provided with the main control unit 41 for controlling the game are mounted, and these boards are shown in FIG. As described above, electronic components such as switches that can be operated by a player are connected via a cable.

  As described above, on the game control board 40, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the insertion medal sensor 31, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and the reel sensor 33L. 33C, 33R, a hopper motor 34b, a payout sensor 34c, and an effect control board 90 are connected.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R, and the inserted medal sensor 31 are played via the operation unit relay board 110. The reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are connected to the game control board 40 via the reel relay board 120, and the hopper motor 34b and the payout sensor 34c are connected to the control board 40 by wiring. The game control board 40 is connected to the game via the power supply board 101, and the effect control board 90 is connected to the game control board 40 via the effect relay board 80.

  The operation unit relay board 110, the reel relay board 120, the power supply board 101, and the effect control board 90 are provided with wiring patterns (not shown) for connecting the game control board 40 and each electronic component. The detection signal output from the component to the game control board 40 or the power or signal supplied (input) from the game control board 40 can be relayed.

  In this way, the various electronic components and the game control board 40 are connected to each other via the relay boards 110, 120, 100, and 80 attached to predetermined positions of the main body of the slot machine 1 (the casing 1a in this embodiment). As a result, the wiring from the game control board 40 to a plurality of electronic components individually arranged at predetermined positions on the main body of the slot machine 1 is facilitated, and the connector connection portion is always connected to the relay board or the game control board 40. As a result, the connector connecting portion of each electronic component is fixed, so that it is possible to prevent a connector connecting portion from being searched for during wiring connection work or to make a mistake in the type of wiring to be connected.

  Single BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, insertion medal sensor 31, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R, hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c Is an electronic component that inputs and outputs signals related to the progress of the game to and from the game control board 40. The signal related to the progress of the game is, for example, an operation for setting the number of bets to make the game startable, an operation for starting the game, or an operation for deriving the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Such as signals output to the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game, detection of inserted medals, detection of the reference position of the reel, detection of the payout medals, etc. And a signal input to the game control board 40, a drive signal for driving the reels 2L, 2C, 2R according to the detection of the start operation, and a hopper for paying out medals when a winning occurs. A signal that is output from the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game and that is input to the game electronic component.

  These gaming electronic components are a first electronic component that outputs a signal to the game control board 40 as the game progresses, and a second that receives a signal from the game control board 40 as the game progresses. And electronic components.

  The gaming electronic component and the board are connected via a cable, and the cable connecting the gaming electronic component and the board is designed to facilitate assembly work and wiring work at the time of manufacturing the slot machine. Separation is possible by releasing the connection. These gaming electronic components are basically electronic components that are continuously used in common with multiple models, and there are few opportunities to remove them from the main unit unless a failure occurs. It is fixed in place. On the other hand, the game control board 40, the effect control board 90, and the like need to be replaced when changing the model, and are removed from the main body at that time. That is, when removing the game control board 40, it is necessary to release the connection between the game electronic component and the effect control board 90, so the cable and the board that connect these boards and the board to the game electronic component are: The cable side connector provided at the end of the cable is electrically connected to the board side connector electrically connected to the wiring pattern of the board, and the cable side connector is removed from the board side connector. By releasing the connection, the game control board 40 can be easily removed from the main body and replaced.

  However, when the slot machine is shipped from the manufacturer to the game store in such a state that the wiring connection between the game control board 40 and the game electronic component can be easily released by removing the connector, for example, in a game store, the board side connector In this case, the cable-side connector can be easily removed from the board-side connector, and the cable-side connector connected to an unauthorized tool such as a so-called driving tool can be easily connected to the board-side connector.

  The driving instrument is, for example, operating various switches and the like provided in the slot machine by causing the game control board 40 to input / output a signal that is a pseudo reproduction of the signal input / output to / from the game control board 40 from the game electronic component. It is possible to automatically advance the game without playing. Therefore, for example, in a game store or the like, the regular connector connected to the board-side connector provided on the game control board 40 is removed, and an unauthorized connector connected to the driving tool is connected instead. By inputting / outputting signals to / from the game control board 40 at an appropriate timing to automatically advance the game, for example, it is possible to easily set a state where a special role is won. Therefore, in the case where illegal sales such as providing a slot machine set in a state where a special role is won using such an illegal driving tool to a player at the start of business at a game shop, There is a risk that the fairness of

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable side of the cable 600a. Connection between the connector 611a and the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110, and connection between the board-side connector 622q of the operation part relay board 110 and the cable-side connector 612q of the cable 601q, the connection between these connectors is released. It is controlled by the member.

  The connector restricting member is not removable unless the release restricting portion is destroyed. In order to release the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, the release restricting portion must be destroyed. As a result, when even one connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, the trace remains and it is extremely difficult to erase the trace. Unauthorized sales can be more effectively suppressed.

  In this embodiment, there is only one relay board between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31. However, when a plurality of relay boards are used, all the connector connections existing between them are disconnected. It is preferable to restrict the removal, and in this way, it becomes difficult to release the connection of any connector between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, so that the illegal business is more effective. Can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the first electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8L, 8C, 8R , 31, 33L, 33C, 33R, 34c for inputting signals to the game control board 40 according to the progress of the game. Of the second electronic components 32L, 32C, 32R, and 34b that output signals from the game control board 40 as the game progresses, only connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40 is restricted. A member is provided to restrict the connection between the connectors. That is, the inserted medal sensor 31 which cannot advance the game without the signal (the bet number cannot be set and the game cannot be started unless the signal from the inserted medal sensor 31 is input) and the game control. The connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection with the board 40 to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors, and the connection between the connectors is released between the other electronic components and the game control board 40 to drive the instrument. of even when replaced in the connector, it becomes impossible to automatically progress substantially player, it is possible to prevent fraud with minimal regulation, for releasing the connection of connectors The number of parts can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, only the connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40 is provided with a connector restricting member to restrict the connection between the connectors, but the start switch 7 and the game control board 40 are not connected. The same effect can be obtained even if a connector restricting member is provided only for connector connection between the connector and the release of the connection between the connectors is restricted. Further, if the reel is not configured to stop until the reel stop operation is performed after the start of the reel rotation as in the present embodiment, between the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R and the game control board 40. The same effect can be obtained even if the connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors.

  In this embodiment, the door opening detection switch 25 is connected to the game control board 40 via a cable. However, any of the connectors of the cable provided between the door opening detection switch 25 and the game control board 40 may be used. When the connection at that connector is released, when the front door 1b is opened, the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board cannot detect that fact, and the door opening notification or door opening is detected. Since the signal is not output, the discovery may be delayed even if the front door 1b is opened and an illegal act is performed.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable of the cable 600a. For the connection between the side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110, and the connection between the board side connector 622q of the operation part relay board 110 and the cable side connector 612q of the cable 601q, the connection between these connectors is released. It is regulated by a connector regulating member.

  This makes it difficult to release the connection between any of the connectors between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, so that the front door 1b is not notified that the front door 1b has been opened. It is possible to effectively prevent the door 1b from being opened.

  Further, as described above, the connector restricting member is not removable unless the release restricting portion is destroyed, and in order to release the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, the release restricting member When the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25 is released, the trace remains and the trace is extremely deleted. Since it is difficult, it can suppress more effectively that front door 1b will be opened in the state where the information that front door 1b was opened is not performed.

  In this embodiment, there is only one relay board between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25. However, when a plurality of relay boards are used, all the connector connections existing between them are connected. It is preferable to restrict the removal, and in this way, it becomes difficult to release the connection of any connector between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, so the front door 1b is opened. It is possible to more effectively prevent the front door 1b from being opened in a state in which the notification of being made is not made.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of signal lines for connecting the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components for inputting / outputting signals necessary for the progress of the game and the door opening detection switch 25 are connected to the game control board 40. Since it is connected to the operation unit relay board 110 with a single cable 600a, the connector connection between the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a of the game control board 40, that is, the connection of only one connector is released. By restricting, it becomes possible to restrict the release of the connection between the plurality of signal lines, and it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of parts for restricting the release of the connector connection, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  When a plurality of signal lines for connecting the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components for inputting / outputting signals necessary for the progress of the game and the door opening detection switch 25 are connected via a plurality of cables. However, in order to regulate the release of these connector connections by arranging the board side connectors close to each other and restricting the release of the connection between the plurality of board side connectors and the plurality of cable side connectors with one component. It is not necessary to prepare a plurality of parts, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the game control board 40 is attached to the main body of the slot machine in a state accommodated in the board case, and the upper case sealing piece and the lower case sealing piece constituting the board case are fixed, If the sealing piece is not destroyed, the board case is opened, and access to the stored game control board 40 is disabled, making it difficult to cheat the game control board 40. However, since the sealing piece is exposed to the outside as it is, it is relatively easy to break the sealing piece and open the substrate case, and the sealing piece is broken and accommodated in the substrate case. There is a possibility that the game control board 40 may be cheated, and countermeasures against these cheating are still insufficient.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, a covering member that covers the sealing piece of the substrate case is attached. As a result, the sealing piece of the substrate case is covered with the covering member, and it becomes impossible to directly access the sealing piece. If the covering member is not removed, the sealing piece cannot be destroyed. It would be very difficult to destroy and open the upper case and the lower case to take out the game control board 40, so that illegal actions such as replacing the game control board 40 with an illegal board are effective. Can be prevented.

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment outputs an external output signal indicating a gaming state, an error occurrence state, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 6, these external output signals are output from the game control board 40 under the control of the main CPU 41a, and the information output terminal board 1010 of the game store (hall) in which the external output board 1000 and the slot machine 1 are installed. Via a hall computer such as a hall computer.

  From the game control board 40 to the external output board 1000, a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals given to the player due to the occurrence of a winning, a gaming state Shifts to a CT signal indicating that a CT is in progress, a CB signal indicating that the gaming state is CB, a door opening signal indicating that the front door 1b is open, and a setting change mode described later. A setting change signal indicating that the medals are in error, an insertion error signal indicating an abnormality in the medal selector, and a payout error signal indicating an abnormality in the hopper unit 34 are output.

  In this embodiment, RB (gaming state in which the winning probability of a small role is increased) and a big bonus with a high probability of RB or always controlled by RB are not mounted, but these gaming states are mounted. In order to make common with the slot machine, in addition to the signal line for outputting the above signal between the game control board 40 and the external output board 1000, an RB signal indicating that the game state is RB, A signal line for outputting a BB signal indicating that the gaming state is in the big bonus is connected, and further, an error output signal line that may be expanded in the future is connected.

  The external output board 1000 is provided with a relay circuit 1001, a parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002, a terminal for each output signal, and a connector 1003 to be electrically connected to the circuit of the information providing terminal board 1010. ing.

  Of the signals output from the game control board 40, the medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, CT signal, CB signal, (RB signal, BB signal) are directly used as pulse signals via the relay circuit 1001. The information is output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  On the other hand, a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a (preliminary signal) are security signals that are serial signals that can be individually identified by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002. And output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  The medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, CT signal, CB signal (RB signal, BB signal) output from the external output board 1000 are output to the hall device via the information providing terminal board 1010. . On the other hand, the security signal output from the external output board 1000 is again converted into a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a spare signal at the information providing terminal board 1010 and output to the hall device. Will be.

  The external output signal includes a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a dispensing error signal, but these door opening signal, setting changing signal, closing error signal, and dispensing error signal are not frequently output signals. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an external output terminal for each of these signals.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, the external output signal output from the game control board 40 as described above is output to the hall device via the external output board 1000, and the door opening signal and setting among these external output signals are set. The change signal, input error signal, and payout error signal are converted into security signals, which are serial signals that can be individually identified, by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000, and output to the outside. Thus, it is possible to output the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, and the dispensing error signal from one terminal, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary.

  In addition, even if there is a spare signal line that is not currently used but may be used in the future, individual signals can be identified with a single terminal, including the signal output from the spare signal line. It is possible to output as much as possible, and a spare signal line terminal that is not used does not become an empty terminal.

  In this embodiment, the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the making error signal, and the paying error signal are serially identifiable by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000. It is converted to a security signal, which is a signal, and output to the outside. For example, any one of a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a paying error signal is output by an AND circuit or the like. In such a case, an error signal may be output to the outside through a single terminal. Even in this case, either an error has occurred in the external device, the door is open, or the setting is being changed. Therefore, it is possible to specify that the terminal is being generated, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary. In this case, since a plurality of signals can be output to the outside with one terminal without being converted into a serial signal, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a uses a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals (credits) used to set the wager number as an external output signal as described above in order to manage sales with a hall computer. Control is performed to output a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals (credits) given to the player as a result of winning to an external device as an external output signal.

  As an output method of the medal IN signal, a method of outputting every time the bet number is set can be considered. In this method, when the bet number is canceled after the bet number is set, the medal IN signal is output. There is a problem that it is necessary to perform control to cancel the output. In addition, when it is possible to set the bet number using both medals and credits, the bet number is set using a program that outputs a medal IN signal when the medals are inserted and the bet number is set and the credits. It is necessary to separately provide a program for outputting the medal IN signal when set.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 7A, the main CPU 41a of the present embodiment, when the operation of the start switch 7 is effectively detected, that is, when the number of bets used in the game is determined, The medal IN signals for the set number of bets are collectively output.

  Specifically, when a predetermined number of bets has not yet been set and the insertion of a medal is detected in a state where the insertion of a medal is permitted, every time one insertion of the medal is detected by the insertion medal sensor 31. One bet is added. When the specified number of bets is set, the operation of the start switch 7 is validated. Thereafter, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, that is, when the bet number used in the game is determined, the main CPU 41a collectively outputs the medal IN signals for the set bet number. In addition, when the bet amount is set by using credit for all or a part of the specified number of bets, the main CPU 41a is set when the specified number of bets is set and the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. The medals IN signals for the number of bets set to are collectively output.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the game is started, that is, when the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is determined, the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is collectively collected from the outside. It is possible to omit the control for canceling the outputted medal IN signal in accordance with the cancellation of the bet number, and the control related to the output of the medal IN signal can be simplified.

  In addition, since the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the bet number is collectively output when the number of medals used for setting the bet number is determined, the bet number is set by inserting the medals. Sometimes it is not necessary to separately provide a program that outputs a medal IN signal and a program that outputs a medal IN signal when the number of bets is set using credits, and a program that outputs a medal IN signal is shared. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the program capacity for outputting the medal IN signal.

  On the other hand, as an output method of the medal OUT signal, a method of outputting the medal OUT signals collectively according to the number of medals paid out at the start of medal payout or a method of outputting the medal OUT signals collectively at the end of the medal payout can be considered. In the former case, when a medal out error occurs while the medal is being paid out and the medal payout is interrupted, the number of medals indicated by the medal OUT signal and the number of medals actually paid out are changed. There is a problem that an error occurs and the external device cannot specify the exact payout number at that time. In the latter case, after the medal payout is completed, the next game cannot be started until the output of the medal OUT signal is completed.

  Therefore, the main CPU 41a of the present embodiment shows that when a medal is paid out by paying out a physical medal from the hopper unit 34, a medal OUT indicating that one medal is awarded every time a medal is paid out. Output a signal.

  More specifically, when a winning with a medal payout occurs and is added to the credit, each time 1 is added to the credit, the main CPU 41a outputs a 1-pulse medal OUT signal indicating the payout of one medal. When the medals are paid out from the hopper unit 34, as shown in FIG. 7B, one medal is paid out and the main CPU 41a indicates the payout of one medal every time it is detected by the payout sensor 34c. A 1-pulse medal OUT signal is output. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 7B, during the medal payout, it is determined that a predetermined payout medal-free time has elapsed since the last medal payout was detected, or the medals are continuous. If the detection time exceeds a predetermined medal clogging time and is determined to be a medal clogging, and if the payout operation is stopped due to a payout error state, the number of sheets actually paid out is stopped before the payout operation is stopped. Only the medal OUT signal is output, the payout error is canceled, the remaining payout is resumed, the remaining medal is paid out, and the medal OUT signal accompanying the payout of the remaining medals is output each time it is detected by the payout sensor 34c. Will be. Then, when the payout of the last medal is detected and the output of the medal OUT signal is completed, the control of one game is finished, and the insertion of the medal is permitted at this time.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a medal is paid out by paying out a physical medal from the hopper unit 34, a medal OUT signal indicating that one medal is awarded every time one medal is paid out. Even if the medal is out and the payout error occurs and the payout of the medal is interrupted, the number of medals indicated by the medal OUT signal and the actual payout Since the number of medals coined out matches, the number of medals paid out can be accurately output to the outside.

  Also, in the method of outputting medals OUT signals collectively according to the number of medals paid out at the start of medal payout or the method of outputting medals OUT signals collectively at the end of medal payout, more medals are forced than the number of medals that are originally paid out. Medal indicating that one medal was awarded each time a medal is paid out, although it is difficult to detect it with an external device such as a hall computer when an illegal act of automatically paying out is performed. By outputting a signal, it is possible to accurately and accurately grasp the number of medals paid out by winning a small role on an external device in real time. It becomes possible to detect and such an illegal act can be prevented effectively.

  In addition, every time a medal is paid out, a medal OUT signal indicating that one medal has been awarded is output. Therefore, the bet number setting operation is permitted immediately after the medal payout is completed. Therefore, since the next game can be started, the game can proceed smoothly.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are, for example, hybrid type stepping motors, and include a stator 32b and a rotor 32a facing the stator 32b. The rotor 32a has a large number of gear-shaped salient poles (not shown), and permanent magnets magnetized in the same direction as the rotation shaft are incorporated therein. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R receive a pulse signal output from the motor drive circuit 45 based on the control of the main CPU 41a, and the respective excitation phases φ1 to φ4 of the stator 32b are excited according to a predetermined procedure. Each time a pulse is received, the rotor 32a is rotated by a predetermined angle (one step).

  FIG. 9A is a timing chart showing a control method when starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R. In the figure, φ1 to φ4 indicate each excitation phase, “ON” indicates an excitation state, and “OFF” indicates a demagnetization state. When starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, the main CPU 41a starts excitation in the rotational direction by a 1-2 phase excitation method, which will be described later, starting from the state where only the stop phase is excited. Specifically, for example, when the stop phase is (φ3), φ1 to φ4 are changed in the order of (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1). Excited alternately in 2 phase, 1 phase and 2 phase.

  If the excitation is started with a phase different from the stop phase as a starting point, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is suddenly attracted to the excitation phase, and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation. In the present embodiment, since the excitation is started from the stop phase as a starting point, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a starts smoothly.

  FIG. 9B is a timing chart showing a control method during rotation and stop of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R.

  First, during the rotation, that is, until the condition for stopping the reel is satisfied, the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method to rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. For example, a pulse signal indicating that φ1 to φ4 is excited is turned ON / OFF at the timing shown in FIG. 9B, and (φ4, φ1), (φ1), (φ1,. (φ2), (φ2), (φ2, φ3), (φ3), (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1)... in this order, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated by exciting the φ1 to φ4 alternately for each phase and rotating the rotor 32a.

  Next, when the condition for stopping the rotating reel is satisfied, that is, when the rotor 32a steps out by an overshoot amount described later, an angle at which the symbol (target symbol) selected by the stop operation can be derived and displayed. When the angle position reaches the position (target stop angle position), the process shifts to the reel stop control from the excited state of the two phases. For example, when the condition for stopping the reel is established in the period shown in FIG. 9B as the stop condition establishment step, the process proceeds to stop control after waiting until time Ta when the two phases are excited. .

  The reel stop control is performed in two stages as indicated by T1 and T2 in FIG. The control performed at T1 is called 2-phase excitation stop control, and the control performed at T2 is called 3-phase excitation stop control.

  The two-phase excitation stop control is started from the time Ta when the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method and the state is shifted from the state in which the one phase is excited to the state in which the two phases are excited. In this control, the excited state is held for a predetermined hold time T1. For example, as shown in FIG. 9B, the state in which (φ1, φ2) is excited is held for the hold time T1 from the time when (φ1, φ2) is excited to the state in which (φ1) is excited. To do. As a result, rapid braking is applied to the rotor 32a of each reel motor that has been rotating at a high speed.

  The hold time T1 is determined according to the amount of overshoot that will cause the step-out, and varies depending on the magnitude of the holding torque of the reel motor, the inertia of the rotor 32a, the spring constant, and the like. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the amount of overshoot is four steps of the stepping motor, and the hold time T1 is set as a time required for the reel motor to drive for three steps. Then, the target stop angle position of the rotor 32a is set three steps ahead from the stage where the two-phase excitation stop control is started in accordance with the hold time T1.

  For this reason, at the time Tb when the hold time T1 elapses, the rotor 32a is in a position immediately before the target stop angle position, and the rotation speed is braked. Therefore, the three-phase excitation stop control is started by switching the excitation pattern at time Tb. That is, φ1 is demagnetized, and the stop phase φ3 corresponding to the target stop angle position and the two brake phases φ2 and φ4 at opposite positions across the stop phase are excited for a predetermined time T2. Thereby, the rotor 32a stops at the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3, that is, the target stop angle position while obtaining the brakes by the brake phases φ2 and φ4. As a result, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a stops at a target stop position where the target symbol can be derived and displayed without being vibrated accurately.

  After the three-phase excitation stop control is executed during T2 (Tc), the brake phases φ2 and φ4 are demagnetized, and the motor voltage is changed from H to L while maintaining the excitation state of the stop phase φ3. The reason why the excited state of the stop phase φ3 is maintained even after the rotor 32a is stopped is that the rotor 32a deviates from the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3 due to the phase difference between the holding torque and the detent torque or the deviation due to the effect of friction. It is for preventing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reel from moving finely after being temporarily stopped and the angular position of the rotor 32a when the reel motor is started next time from being shifted from the angular position at the time of stopping.

  The excitation state of the stop phase φ3 that is maintained even after the rotor 32a is stopped is a predetermined time (30 seconds in this embodiment) without performing the next game start operation, and shifts to a standby state (demonstration effect). Is released (Td). That is, after the rotor 32a is stopped, when a predetermined time has passed without the start operation of the next game being performed, all of φ1 to φ4 are demagnetized. For this reason, for example, there is no burden on the components and the like constituting the stepping motor due to the heat generated when the excitation phase is continuously excited for a long time, so that deterioration of these components can be prevented. Further, in this embodiment, the excited state is released at the timing when the state in which the next game start operation is not performed continues for a predetermined time and shifts to the standby state (demonstration effect), so that while the player is playing Can maintain a state in which the symbols arranged on the reels are not easily displaced, while it is possible to reduce the load on the components of the stepping motor in a state where the possibility that the player is playing is low.

  As described above, in order to start the rotation of the reel smoothly, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor. In this embodiment, the two-phase excitation stop control and the three-phase excitation control are performed. By performing the stop control of the reel motor in combination with the excitation stop control, the rotation of the rotor 32a is rapidly braked by the two-phase excitation stop control and is guided to the target stop angle position, and thereafter by the three-phase excitation stop control. Since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position by excitation of the stop phase while obtaining the brake by excitation of the two brake phases at opposite positions across the stop phase of the target stop angle position, the rotor 32a is rotating. The rotor 32a can be stopped at the target stop angle position without vibrating. Furthermore, since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a is specified, so that the reel can be smoothly rotated at the start of rotation.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the payout rate being lower in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantages decrease stepwise in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a stop phase work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work in which data that is inconvenient if it is initialized at the end of the CB, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time counter. The general work is a work that stores data that can be initialized at the end of the CB, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, and the total number of medals paid out in the CB. The special work is a work that stores data to be initialized only before the start of setting, such as data for transmitting a command to the effect control board 90 and various software random numbers. The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored. The set value that is corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored. The stop phase work is a work in which data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stored, and data indicating the stop phase is stored when the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are stopped. The Rukoto. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is established by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. In this case, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a operates when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON, when a RAM error occurs, when starting only when the setting key switch 37 is ON, CB At the end, when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both OFF, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed, the six initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied In addition, five types of initialization are performed in different regions to be initialized according to each initialization condition.

  Initialization 0 is performed when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON at the time of start-up, and initialization is performed before the transition to the setting change mode or when a RAM abnormality error occurs. In initialization 0, all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the storage area of the RAM 41c other than the used stack area are initialized. Initialization 1 is an initialization performed only when the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of start-up and shifts to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, in the storage area of the RAM 41c, All areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) other than the in-use stack area and the stop phase work are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the CB. In initialization 2, a general work, an unused area, and an unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an OFF state at the time of activation, and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The stored work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, initialization 0 and initialization 1 are performed before transition to the setting change mode. However, they may be performed at the end of the setting change mode, that is, after the setting is confirmed. In this case, if the set value work is initialized, the determined set value is lost. Therefore, the set value work is not initialized.

  As described above, in order to start the reel smoothly, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor. If the data in the RAM 41c including the data indicating the stop phase is initialized, it is impossible to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a after changing the setting. When the reel motor is first rotated, Since the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to the excitation phase and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation, the rotation mode of the reel becomes unsightly and the player has forgotten that the setting has been changed. There is a problem of end.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, data indicating the stop phase when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are stopped (0, 1, 2, and 3 indicate φ1, φ2, φ3, and φ4, respectively) is allocated to the RAM 41c. By setting the stopped phase work, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a can be specified. When only the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of start-up, and when shifting to the setting change mode, the RAM 41c is initialized, but the stop phase work is not initialized. Even in this gaming state, data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R stored in the stop phase work is maintained. For this reason, even when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are first rotated after the setting is changed, it is possible to specify the exact stop position of these rotors 32a. It becomes possible to start rotation smoothly. As a result, the reel does not vibrate when the reel is first rotated after the setting is changed, and it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the setting has been changed.

  In addition, both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an ON state at the time of starting, and the RAM 41c including the stop phase work can be initialized when shifting to the setting change mode. Therefore, it is possible to select whether or not to initialize the stationary phase work according to the operation method when shifting to the setting change mode at the time of activation. As a result, it is possible to initialize the RAM 41c including the stop phase work, so that an illegal program or the like becomes resident by using the stop phase work assigned to store the excitation phase of the stepping motor. Can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the RAM 41c is initialized when only the setting key switch 37 is activated and shifted to the setting change mode. At this time, by not initializing the stop phase work, By maintaining the data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R stored in the stop phase work even in the gaming state after the setting change, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are first rotated after the setting change. Even in this case, these stop phases can be specified, but even when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared as the set value is changed, a specific initial excitation phase is set as the stop phase work. The excitation phase indicated by the data set for the stop phase work is excited before the game can be started after the setting is changed. 32L, 32C, when rotating the 32R, may be able to identify these stop phases.

  Specifically, by clearing the data in the RAM 41c as the set value is changed, 0 indicating φ1 which is the initial excitation phase is set in the stop phase work. After the data indicating the initial excitation phase φ1 is set in the stop phase work, the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work, that is, the initial excitation phase φ1 is excited before the game can be started. . The data indicating the initial excitation phase is set in the stop phase work by clearing the stop phase work in the RAM 41c, but the data set in the stop phase work is changed to the data indicating the initial excitation phase. By updating, data indicating the initial excitation phase may be set in the stop phase work.

  As a result, even when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared as the setting value is changed, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to φ1 which is the initial excitation phase before the game can be started, and the angular position of the rotor 32a. And the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work can be matched, and then the data in which the angular position of the rotor 32a is set in the stop phase work when starting the reel motor in the first game is obtained. Since excitation is started in a state that coincides with the excitation phase shown, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a can be started smoothly. Therefore, when the reel is rotated for the first time after the setting is changed, the reel does not vibrate, and it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the setting has been changed.

  Also, when the main CPU 41a is started, even when returning to the state before the power interruption, the specific initial excitation phase is set as the stop phase work, and the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work is changed after the setting change, It is preferable to excite the game before the game can be started. As a result, for example, the correspondence between the angular position of the rotor 32a and the stop phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work by moving the reel manually. Even when the power cannot be removed, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to φ1, which is the initial excitation phase, when the power is turned on, and the angular position of the rotor 32a and the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work can be matched. Thereafter, when starting the reel motor in the first game, the angular position of the rotor 32a matches the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work. Because to start excited by state, it is possible to smoothly start the reels are integrally coupled with the rotor 32a.

  In addition, the excitation state of the initial excitation phase is a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds, without waiting for the game start operation) as in the stop phase excitation state maintained after the rotor 32a is stopped. It is preferable to be released when the state (the same timing as the transition to the demonstration effect) has elapsed, and in this way there will be no burden on the parts that make up the stepping motor. Deterioration can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the overflow tank 35 is full based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a, and when it is determined that the full tank is full, a reset operation (reset switch 23 or reset) is performed. The operation is controlled to a full error state that disables the progress of the game until the / setting switch 38 is operated.

  In this embodiment, the medals inserted from the outside are first stored in the hopper tank 34a, and the overflow medals are stored in the overflow tank 35 when the hopper tank 34a is full. Whether or not the full tank state of the tank 35 is detected by the full tank sensor 35a and the full tank state is determined. However, whether or not the overflow tank 35 is provided and the storage amount of the hopper tank 34a is equal to or greater than a certain amount. May be provided, and the full tank state of the hopper tank 34a may be detected by the full tank sensor to determine the full tank state. In addition, a first full sensor that detects whether or not the amount stored in the hopper tank 34a is equal to or greater than a certain amount is provided. When the first full sensor detects that the hopper tank 34a is full, the flow path of the inserted medal is set. In addition to switching to the overflow tank 35 side, a second full tank sensor for detecting the full tank state of the overflow tank 35 is provided, and the full tank state is determined based on detection of one or both of the first full sensor and the second full sensor. It may be determined. For example, even when the second full sensor detects the full state, the medal stored in the hopper tank 34a may be paid out and the first full sensor may not detect the full state. By switching the flow path of inserted medals again to the hopper tank 34a side, medals can be stored until both tanks are full. Further, in such a case, even if only the second full sensor detects the full state, it is not determined that the full state is reached, and both the first full sensor and the second full sensor are full. When it is determined that the full tank state is detected, it is possible to further reduce the frequency at which the full tank state is determined.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the output state of the detection signal output from the full sensor 35a in the switch input determination process performed every 2.24 ms in the timer interrupt process. In the switch input determination process, when input determination of other switches (start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) is performed, the state is switched from the off state to the on state, and continuously (for a certain period of time) The number of times assigned for each switch type) On the condition that the switch is determined to be ON, the ON state of the switch is determined and the detection flag of the switch is set in the RAM 41c. For 35a, the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by switching from the off state to the on state, and the detection flag of the sensor is set in the RAM 41c. This is because the full sensor 35a is driven at a higher voltage than the other switches, and even if noise or the like occurs, there is little voltage fluctuation and erroneous detection is less likely to occur. In this way, in the switch input determination process, the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by the detection signal of the full sensor 35a changing from off to on, and the duration from when the full sensor 35a changes from off to on. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control related to the determination of the detection state of the full sensor 35a.

  The main CPU 41a determines whether or not it is in a full state based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a (the presence or absence of a detection flag) only once per game at the timing when the insertion of a medal is first detected after the end of the game control. If the full tank sensor 35a is on, the full tank flag is set and the full tank flag indicating the full tank state is set in the RAM 41c. However, in the next game in which the re-game player wins, the game ends. The medal is not allowed to be inserted until the medals are inserted, and the insertion of medals is not effectively detected. In the next game in which the re-game player wins, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. Even if the full sensor 35a is detected, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is not set. Further, the main CPU 41a detects the inserted medal sensor 31 even when the medal insertion is not permitted. However, even if the insertion of a medal is detected during the replay game, the main CPU 41a inserts a valid medal. In this case, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. Even when the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the main CPU 41a sets the bet amount using the credit, and even when the game starts without the medal being inserted, the medal is inserted. In such a case, the determination of whether or not the full tank state is reached is omitted, and even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected, the full tank state is not determined and the full tank flag is set. There is nothing.

  Further, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the full tank flag is set at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the full tank state is determined. When the tongue flag is set, the progress of the game is disabled, and a full error state is controlled until a reset operation is performed. The main CPU 41a determines whether or not the replay game in-process flag is set in the RAM 41c before determining whether or not the full tank flag is set after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the game is a replay game. If it is a replay game, the determination of whether or not the full tank flag is set is omitted. In such a case, even if the full tank flag is set, a full tank error state is set. Is not controlled, and if the replay game ends and is not a replay game, the full tank flag is determined at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 10, when the insertion of a medal is detected for the first time after the end of the game control, it is determined whether or not the full tank sensor 35a is full based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. If it is on, it is determined that the tank is full and a full tank flag is set in the RAM 41c. After that, if the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, after the control of the game is finished, the full-game error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted. On the other hand, when the re-gamer wins in the game and the replay game flag is set (not shown), the full game error state is not controlled after the game ends, and the next game (replay game) After the completion of, the full-error error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game (or the next game if the next game is also a replay game) can be inserted. That is, in the game next to the game in which the re-game player wins, the full tank error state is not controlled.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the game next to the game won by the re-gamer, the insertion of medals is not permitted and the insertion of medals is not detected effectively. Even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected in the state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, when the re-player is not won in the game and the medal can be inserted, it is determined that the medal is inserted for the first time when the medal is detected, and the game is full. If the tongue flag is set in the RAM 41c and the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, it is controlled to a full tank error state at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the end of the control of the game.

  Although not particularly illustrated, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, if the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without the medal being inserted, No charging is detected, and even if the full sensor 35a is detected in such a state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, the medal can be inserted, and when the insertion of the medal is first detected, it is determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is set in the RAM 41c. In other words, a game is played by setting the number of bets using credits, and if no medal is inserted during that time, a full tank error state is not determined until the next game where a medal is inserted. There is no control.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, after the game control is finished, the medal stored in the overflow tank 35 is detected only once per game at the timing when the insertion of the medal is first detected based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. It is determined whether or not the amount of storage is full, and if it is determined that the tank is full, the game progress is disabled and controlled to a full tank error state until a reset operation is performed. For example, when a replay game or a credit is used, in a game in which medals are not inserted from the outside, monitoring whether or not the amount of stored medals stored in the overflow tank 35 is full, The amount of game media stored in the overflow tank 35 is full even though the medal storage amount does not increase. In addition to being unnecessarily monitored whether or not it has become unnecessary, it is controlled by a full-fill error more frequently than necessary, which causes annoyance to the player and increases the labor of the game hall clerk. There is a problem that it ends up.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the next replay game in which the re-game player has won a prize as described above, the insertion of medals is not permitted until the game ends, so that the insertion of medals is detected effectively. The determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is not wasted, and the full tank can be monitored efficiently. It can reduce the control load required to determine the tank status and reduce the frequency of full tank errors as much as possible, making the player feel bothersome and reducing the labor of the store clerk to eliminate the full tank status. Is possible.

  In addition, since the determination of the full tank state is made when the insertion of the medal is detected, in the replay game in which the insertion of the medal is prohibited, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is inevitably omitted. In performing the control for omitting the determination of whether or not the replay game is full in the replay game, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the game is a replay game.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, whether or not a full error has occurred at the timing when the insertion of medals is first detected in a state where the medals of the next game can be inserted, that is, at the timing when medals stored in the overflow tank 35 increase. Since the determination is performed, the full tank state can be determined at an efficient timing.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, when the insertion of the second medal or the third medal is detected in a state where the medal of the next game can be inserted, the bet number is set using credits. In some cases, an insufficient amount of bets may be set by inserting medals. In such a case, the game is determined to be full in the game even though the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 has increased. In this embodiment, after the game control is completed, the full tank state is detected at the timing when the insertion of the medal is first detected in the state where the medal of the next game can be inserted. Therefore, in a game in which the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 increases, it becomes possible to reliably detect the full tank state.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the bet amount is set using the credit, and the game is started when the medal is not inserted and the game is started. The determination of whether or not the state is in a state is omitted, and in a game in which no medal is inserted and the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase, the determination of whether or not the full tank error has occurred is useless. It is possible to monitor the full tank condition efficiently without reducing the control load for determining the full tank condition and to reduce the frequency of full tank errors as much as possible. It becomes possible to reduce the labor for the store clerk to solve the full tank state.

  In addition, since the full state is determined when the insertion of a medal is detected, the number of bets is set using credits, and it is inevitable when the game starts without a medal being inserted. The determination of whether or not the vehicle is full is omitted, and when the number of bets is set using credits and the game starts without a medal being inserted, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is full. In performing the control not to be performed, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the credit is used.

  In this embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted, and when the full tank flag is set, It is controlled to a full tank error state before the next game medal can be inserted. For this reason, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated once in a state where the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating by being controlled to a full tank error state from the start of the game to the end of the game control. The rotation state is stopped, and the full tank error state is controlled. Thereafter, when the full tank error state is canceled, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated again, or the hopper motor 34b is driven to perform the medal payout operation. It is not necessary to perform complicated control such as stopping the medal payout operation once in a state of being in a state, controlling to a full tank error state, and then restarting the medal payout operation when the full tank error state is canceled. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and the control related to the progress of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  In the present embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. It is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set. If the full tank flag is set, the full tank error state may be controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, even when the full tank state is determined after the game control is completed and the full tank flag is set, if the re-gamer has won a prize in the previous game and the next game is a replay game, the game is full. Since it is not controlled by the tan error state, the frequency of full tan errors can be further reduced, so that it is possible to make the player feel bothersome and reduce the labor for the store clerk to resolve the full tank state. It becomes.

  Further, in this embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the tank is full is made at the timing when the insertion of the medal is detected for the first time after the end of the game control, but whether or not the tank is full at least once per game. For example, after completion of the game control, it may be determined whether or not the next game medal can be filled up, or whether the game is started. A determination may be made as to whether or not the tank is full at the time of detection or when the game control ends.

  Here, a modified example of the control in the full tank error state will be described. In this modified example, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not it is in a full state based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a only once per game at the timing before the medal insertion of the next game is permitted after the game control is finished. However, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game based on the replay game flag before determining whether or not the tank is full, and determines that the game is a replay game. In the case, it is further determined whether or not the medal insertion flag is set, that is, whether or not a medal is inserted in the previous game, and only when it is determined that the medal insertion flag is set, the full tank state Whether or not is determined. For this reason, when the re-gamer wins in the previous game and no medals need to be inserted in the game (when the game is a replay game), or the bet number is set using credits in the previous game, When the game starts without being inserted, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the determination as to whether or not it is full is omitted, and the full state is not determined.

  When the main CPU 41a determines that the game is full, the main CPU 41a disables the progress of the game at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted, and controls to the full error state until a reset operation is performed. To do. The main CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game before determining whether or not the game is full after the game control is finished. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled. On the other hand, if it is not a replay game, it is determined whether or not medals have been inserted in the previous game, and if no medals have been inserted in the previous game, determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled, and if a medal is inserted in the previous game, the game control after the next game is over and the next It is determined whether or not the game medal of the game is full at a timing before the game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, and the next game is a replay game. If not, it is further determined whether or not a medal has been inserted in the previous game, and if a medal has been inserted in the previous game, it is determined whether or not the full state is detected based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. When it is determined that the full tank state is reached, the full tank error state is controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 13, after the game control is finished, when the medal insertion flag is not set, that is, when the number of bets is set using credits in the previous game, and the game starts without inserting medals. In this state, it is not determined whether or not the full tank state is reached. Even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in this state, it is controlled to the full tank error state after the game control of the game is finished. There is nothing. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), it is determined that the state is full, and the full tank error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 14, when the next game is a replay game after the game control is finished, that is, when a re-game player wins a prize in the previous game and it is not necessary to insert a medal in the game, It is not determined whether or not the vehicle is in the tan state, and even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in such a state, the full tank error state is not controlled after the game control of the game is finished. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), it is determined that the state is full, and the full tank error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  In this modified example, as described above, after the game control is finished and before the medal of the next game can be inserted, it is only once per game based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a. If it is determined that the game is full, the game progress is disabled and controlled to a full tank error state until a reset operation is performed. Before, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game, and if it is a replay game, the determination of whether or not it is full is omitted. It is possible to monitor the full tank state efficiently, reduce the control load required to determine the full tank state, and reduce the frequency of full tank errors as much as possible. Or allowed to think, it is possible to reduce the effort for the clerk to eliminate the full state.

  Further, in the modification, when the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without inserting medals, the determination as to whether or not the game is full is omitted after the game control ends. In the case where no medal is inserted and the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase, the determination of whether or not a full tank error has occurred is not performed wastefully, and the full tank state can be efficiently obtained. The monitoring load can be reduced, and the control load required to determine the full tank status can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible, making the player feel bothersome and the effort required for the store clerk to clear the full tank status. Can be reduced.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full. After the game is over, the overflow tank 35 is determined. A full tank state can be determined before the number of medals increases. When the full tank state is determined, a full tank error state is set before the next game medal can be inserted, so that the progress of the game is disabled before the medal increases in the overflow tank 35, The amount of storage in the overflow tank 35 will not increase any more, and the full tank error state is controlled between the start of the game and the end of the control of the game, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, When the 2R is rotating, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped once and controlled to a full tank error state, and then the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are restarted when the full tank error state is released. Or when the medal payout operation is stopped by driving the hopper motor 34b, the medal payout operation is once stopped, and a full tank error state occurs. Controlling, when it is released subsequently fully Tan'era state, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such or to resume dispensing operation of medals. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and the control related to the progress of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated. In addition, since the determination of the full tank state and the accompanying control of the full tank error state are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full at the end of the game control. Even if it is determined whether or not, the full tank state can be determined after the game is over and before the medal is increased in the overflow tank 35.

  Also, in this case, when a full tank state is determined, the full tank error state may be controlled before proceeding to the next game. In this case, the game control is once interrupted and then the game It is not necessary to perform control such as resuming control of the game, and it is possible to prevent the control related to the progress of the game from becoming complicated. In addition, since the determination of the full tank state and the accompanying control of the full tank error state are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  Next, commands that the main CPU 41a transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a sends a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a gaming state command, a standby command to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including a stop command, an error command, an initialization command, a setting end command, a power-on command, an operation detection command, and a door command are transmitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number. When a medal is inserted, the one-BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 is operated to set the bet number. Sent when

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted every time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The game state command is a game state of the next game (whether it is a normal game state, is in RT (1), is in RT (2), is in RT (3), is in CB , CT, etc.) and the number of remaining RT games and the currently set value can be specified, and are transmitted after a setting end command to be described later and at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and after one game is over, a credit (which was used for setting the bet number) is set when the transition to the standby state is made after a predetermined time without setting the bet number. (Including medals) is sent out after the medal payout is completed and the payout end command is sent.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized and the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the RAM 41c is initialized and shifts to the setting change mode.

  The setting end command is a command indicating the end of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends.

  The power-on command is a command that indicates whether or not one of the special roles has been won at power-on, and if it can be restored to the state before the power interruption at startup, it returns to the state before the power interruption. Sent when.

  The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, that is, ON (open state) / OFF (closed state). When the power is turned on, one game is finished (after the game is over, the bet number of the next game) Sent before the setting can be started), and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes (ON to OFF, OFF to ON).

The operation detection command is the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10, that is, ON / OFF, and these switches are effective in the progress of the game. or some or disabled state (one BET switch 5, MAXBET reception operation of the switch 6 is a capable betting amount setting state, and by betting amount prescribed number is set yet Orazu, further It is valid when credits remain and is invalid otherwise.Acceptance of the operation of the start switch 7 is valid until the start switch 7 is operated after the specified number of bets is set, otherwise The operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is accepted after the reels are rotated at a constant speed and the reels are ready to stop. It is valid until each stop operation is detected, otherwise it is invalid.The settlement switch 10 has a credit remaining or a bet amount is set in the period from the end of the game to the start of the next game. This command is valid when the switch is active, and otherwise is invalid.) When the detection state of these switches changes, whether the acceptance of the operation is valid for the progress of the game, Sent regardless of invalid period.

  Of these commands, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated in an activation process and a game process described later, temporarily stored in a normal command transmission buffer provided in a special work of the RAM 41c, and the timer interrupt process described above. Sent in (main).

  The normal command transmission buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 16 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  The door command is stored in a door command transmission buffer provided in a special work in the RAM 41c in the door monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  The door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one door command can be stored is allocated. The door command transmission buffer stores a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at the time of power-on or at the end of one game, and after the change of the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Stored is a door command indicating the detected state. Further, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is not cleared even after the door command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by the newly stored door command. When the power is turned on or one game is finished, the door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set, and the door command transmission request 1 is set or the door is opened. When the detection state of the detection switch 25 changes, the door command transmission request 2 is set. When this door command transmission request 2 is set, the door stored in the door command transmission buffer is set. Command transmission is instructed.

  The operation detection command is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer provided in the special work of the RAM 41c in the switch monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above. The

  The operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer and the door command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one operation detection command can be stored is allocated. The operation detection command transmission buffer includes a single BET switch 5, a MAXBET switch 6, a start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and a detection state after the change when the detection state of the checkout switch 10 changes. An operation detection command indicating validity / invalidity of each switch at the time is stored. In addition, the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is not cleared after the operation detection command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by the newly stored operation detection command. It has become. An operation detection command transmission request is set when the detection state of any of these switches changes, and an operation detection command transmission buffer is set by setting the operation detection command transmission request. The operation detection command stored in the command is transmitted.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a executes timer interrupt processing at intervals of 0.56 ms. In the timer interrupt process, timer interrupts 1 to 4 are repeatedly performed, and processes unique to the timer interrupts 1 to 4 are performed at intervals of 2.24 ms. The command transmission process for transmitting the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is a timer allocation. The command transmission process is also executed at intervals of 2.24 ms.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 91a acquires a command buffered in a reception buffer, which will be described later, in a timer interrupt process (sub) that is executed at an interval of 1.12 ms. For this reason, every time the main CPU 41a executes a timer interrupt process, that is, when a command transmission process is performed at an interval of 0.56 ms, there is a possibility that the sub-control unit 91 cannot receive the command normally.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main CPU 41a executes the command transmission process at a rate of once per four timer interrupt processes, that is, at an interval of 2.24 ms. By transmitting only one of the command stored in the transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer, a plurality of commands can be transmitted. Even in the case of continuous transmission, transmission is performed with an interval of at least 2.24 ms, and these continuously transmitted commands can be reliably acquired on the sub-control unit 91 side.

  In the present embodiment, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated according to the progress of the game in the activation process or the game process, and stored in the normal command transmission buffer. In the door command, when the door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set in the activation process or the game process, or the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is changed. In this case, it is stored in the door command transmission buffer. The operation detection command is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer when the detection state of any one of the BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R, and the checkout switch 10 changes. Is done.

  In the command transmission process in the timer interrupt 2, an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, an untransmitted door command transmission request stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command transmission buffer When a transmission request for the stored operation detection command is detected, a delay time is set, and when the set delay time elapses, the unsent command and door command transmission buffer stored in the normal command transmission buffer The operation command stored in the door or the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  Specifically, in the command transmission process, an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. When detected, the random number for delay set in the range of 0 to 17 is acquired and set in the delay counter provided in the special work of the RAM 41c.

  At this time, in the command transmission process in which the delay counter value is set and the command transmission process executed in the timer interrupt 2 thereafter, the delay counter value is decremented by 1 and when the delay counter value becomes 0, An untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  That is, the command detected in the command transmission process is a time corresponding to a multiple of the command transmission process execution interval (2.24 ms). Specifically, the command transmission process is performed by subtracting 1 from the delay counter value acquired at that time. Is transmitted after the elapse of time (2.24 ms) {0 to 35.84 ms because the delay counter value is 0 to 17}.

  In addition, the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer are interrupted by the basic processing. Since it is performed within (main), processing is not delayed due to command delay.

  Further, in this embodiment, an area capable of storing a plurality of commands is provided in the normal command transmission buffer, the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, Alternatively, a newly generated command can be stored in an empty area of the normal command transmission buffer without waiting for transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. That is, a plurality of commands can be stored in the normal command transmission buffer. For this reason, it can be avoided that the progress of the game is stopped due to the delay of the command transmission. This is not the case when the normal command transmission buffer is full of untransmitted commands.

  In the command storage process, when a plurality of commands are stored in the normal command transmission buffer, these commands are stored in the order of generation. In the command transmission process, the commands are transmitted in the order stored in the normal command transmission buffer. It is like that. That is, commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer are transmitted in the order in which they are generated.

  Note that the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with the highest priority. Before the power-on command or initialization command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, other normal commands ( Hereinafter, commands other than the door command, operation detection command, power-on command, and initialization command are called normal commands) (in the case of an initialization command, store in the normal command transmission buffer before that) Even if the normal command is not already stored since the data is also cleared, the power-on command or the initialization command is transmitted with priority.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer and a door command transmission is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set), in principle, the normal command transmission buffer. The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is transmitted with priority over the command stored in.

  Note that when the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is a power-on command or an initialization command, or when the normal command transmission buffer stored in the normal command transmission buffer is waiting (delayed), the door command However, this is not the case when a request for transmission is requested, and the power-on command, initialization command, or normal command waiting to be transmitted is given priority. After being sent, send a door command. If an untransmitted normal command remains in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting a normal command waiting for transmission, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is preferentially transmitted.

  In addition, when a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, an operation detection command transmission is requested (when an operation detection command transmission request is set), or door command transmission and operation detection. When command transmission is requested at the same time, as a rule, the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer or the door command transmission buffer is stored rather than the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. Priority is given to the door command being sent.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer while waiting for transmission of an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer (during delay), or when transmission of a door command is requested However, the operation detection command waiting for transmission is transmitted with priority, and after the operation detection command waiting for transmission is transmitted, the normal command or the door command is transmitted.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms. Specifically, in any of the timer interrupts 1 to 4 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, in the port input process performed every 0.56 ms, an input state (door) in which the detection signal from the door open detection switch 25 is converted to a positive logic. Open detection switch 25ON = 1 (door open state), door open detection switch 25OFF = 0 (door closed state)), and is performed by timer interrupt 2 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, every 2.24 ms. In the door monitoring process to be performed, the detection state of the detection signal of the door opening detection switch 25 acquired in the port input process described above (the input state that is the same for two consecutive times) is logically ORed for about 100 ms (45 times of the door monitoring process). Subsequently, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is determined using the result. If the calculation result is 1 when about 100 ms elapses, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is ON. If the calculation result is 0, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is not turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF. If the result of this determination matches the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, it is determined that there is no change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Otherwise, it is determined that the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 has changed, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is updated to a door command indicating the detection state after the change, and the door command transmission request 2 Is set to command transmission of the door command. When determining that the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has changed, the main CPU 41a requests an update of the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  The main CPU 41a sets the door command transmission request 1 in the activation process or the game process when the power is turned on or at the end of one game, and requests transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. On the other hand, in the door monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the door command transmission request 1 is set. If the door command transmission request 1 is set, it is determined that there is a door command transmission request and the door command transmission is performed. Request 2 is set to command transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. In addition, when the door command transmission request 1 is set, the main CPU 41a requests an update of the door open signal output state for the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  In this way, when commanding the transmission of the door command, it is also required to update the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000, so the door opening signal output state is linked to the door command transmission command. And is updated.

  In the present embodiment, the door command is given priority over the normal command as described above, and the door command is transmitted after a delay time determined at random has passed as in the case of other commands. On the other hand, since the maximum command delay time is 35.84 ms, when transmission of a door command is requested in a state where the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, after the door command is transmitted, Further, it takes about 72 ms until the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted. However, the monitoring interval of the door open detection switch 25 is further stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. If the detected state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed if it is shorter than about 72 ms required for transmitting the normal command being stored, the normal command transmission buffer is stored while the change continues. Normal command sending buffer will not be sent, so normal command sending buffer overflows There is a possibility become. For this reason, in this embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is about longer than about 72 ms required for transmitting the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. Even if the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed, the normal command is transmitted after the door command is transmitted until the next door command is transmitted. At least one normal command stored in the transmission buffer can be transmitted, so that the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the detection states of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10 about every 10 ms. Specifically, in the above-described port input process performed every 0.56 ms, an input state in which detection signals from the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 are converted to positive logic. (ON = 1, OFF = 0) is acquired, and the timer interrupt process (main) is performed by timer interrupt 2, that is, the switch monitoring process performed every 2.24 ms, the 1 acquired in the above-described port input process The detection state of the detection signals of the sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 (input state that is the same for two consecutive times) is about 10 ms (door monitoring process 5 1) BET switch 5, MAXB using the result of continuing logical OR separately. Determining T switch 6, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, the detection state of the adjusting switch 10. When the calculation result is 1 when about 10 ms elapses, that is, when ON is detected even once during that time, it is determined that the corresponding switch is ON, and when the calculation result is 0, that is, during that time If ON is not detected even once, it is determined that the corresponding switch is OFF. If the result of this determination matches the detection state of each switch indicated by the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer, it is determined that there is no change in the detection state. The operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is changed to an operation detection command that indicates the detection state after the change and indicates the validity / invalidity of each switch at that time. Update, set operation detection command transmission request, and instruct transmission of the operation detection command.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  The sub CPU 91a executes a command reception interrupt process when a strobe signal indicating the transmission of a command from the main CPU 41a is input. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  The receiving buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 128 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub CPU 91a is the earliest stage. Based on the received command, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to. Based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table, various effects such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, etc. Control the device.

  In this embodiment, the time interval (1.12 ms) at which the sub CPU 91a performs the timer interrupt process (sub) is shorter than the time interval (2.24 ms) at which the main CPU 41a transmits a command. If an operation associated with a normal game is performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is not received until the next command is received even when commands are continuously transmitted from the main CPU 41a. It is read by the timer interrupt process (sub), and a plurality of unprocessed commands are not accumulated in the reception buffer. When a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a is received, the timer interrupt process performed first after that The command received by (sub) is read and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the sub CPU 91a receives the command, the sub CPU 91a, among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table, With reference to the control pattern corresponding to the received command type, the rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the sub CPU 91a receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and responds to the newly received command. An effect based on the control pattern is executed. In other words, even if the production is not finished to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new command is received unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command is executed.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when an operation for setting the number of bets is performed during execution of an effect, that is, when the sub CPU 91a receives a BET command indicating that the number of bets has been set, the effect being executed is canceled. It is supposed to be. For this reason, if the player wants to proceed to the next game rather than seeing the production to the end, the production is canceled and the next game can be started. There is no. Further, when a credit or bet amount adjustment operation is performed during the performance, that is, after the sub CPU 91a receives a game state command indicating the end of the game, and before receiving an internal winning command indicating the start of the game. When the payout start command is received, the performance being executed is stopped. Credits and bets are settled when the game is terminated. In such a case, by terminating the performance that is being executed, there is an intention to end the game, but the performance continues unnecessarily. It is designed not to be overwhelmed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b. When the sub CPU 91a receives the internal winning command, it is registered in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The selected selection pattern is selected from a plurality of types of production patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected production pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the production pattern of the game.

  The control pattern table contains specific controls that are referred to when a specific command (standby command, stop command, error command, initialization command, setting end command, power-on command indicating that special role is elected, etc.) is received. When the pattern is stored and the sub CPU 91a receives these specific commands, the sub CPU 91a refers to the specific control pattern corresponding to the command regardless of the effect pattern set in the game, and The rendering device is controlled based on the pattern.

  When a standby command is received, a demo pattern for executing a demonstration effect (demonstration effect) is referred to as a control pattern. In addition, when the final effect that informs the winning of the special role is being executed, the execution of the demo effect is prohibited, and the demo pattern is controlled even if a standby command is received in such a state. It is not referred to as a pattern, and no demonstration effect is executed.

  When a stop command indicating the occurrence of a stop state is received, a stop notification pattern for notifying that the stop state is in effect is referred to as a control pattern. When a stop command indicating release of the stop state is received, the above-described demo pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, when the stop state is released, the demonstration effect is executed.

  When an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state is received, an error notification pattern for notifying the fact of the error state and its type is referred to as a control pattern. When an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is received, the control pattern that was being executed when the error occurred is referred to. That is, the production at the time of error occurrence is executed from the beginning.

  When the initialization command is received, a setting notification pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed is referred to. When the setting end command is received, the demo pattern described above is referred to as a control pattern. In other words, when an initialization command is received, a notification during setting change is executed, and when a setting end command is received thereafter, a demonstration effect is executed.

  When a power-on command indicating that a special role is won is received, a special role notification pattern for notifying that the special role has been won is referred to. That is, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is won is received, a notification effect for notifying that the special role is won is executed. Note that the notification effect for notifying the winning of the special combination is once executed until it receives a winning determination command indicating that the special combination has won.

  Regardless of whether or not the effect state before power interruption can be restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c at the time of activation, the sub CPU 91a receives an initialization command or a power-on command before actually starting the effect. Wait until either is received. When the initialization command is received in this state, the data in the RAM 91c is cleared. In addition, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected is received in this state, a notice effect indicating that the special role is elected is executed, and when a power-on command indicating that the special role is not elected is received, If it is possible to return to the performance state before the power interruption, the demonstration is performed. Also, in the state of waiting for receiving the initialization command or the power-on command, the execution of the timer interrupt process that executes the presentation based on the reception of the command is not permitted. An effect based on the command is not performed, and no effect is performed until the initialization command or the power-on command is received after the startup and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted.

  For this reason, even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected when the power is turned on and the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are connected thereafter, the sub control unit 91 does not Since no initialization command has been received, the production control is not performed, and even when the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected at the time of startup, the sub control unit 91 is turned on. It is impossible to avoid receiving the command and avoid the execution of the notification effect indicating that the special role is won. Thus, when the main control unit 41 is started, the state before power interruption is restored, and before power interruption. When the special role is elected, the winning of the special role is surely notified.

  On the other hand, it is necessary to turn off the power once to connect unauthorized tools such as driving tools (disconnecting the connector without turning off the power). With the above configuration, the connector is forcibly released. Even if the special tool is won by using a driving tool, it can be easily determined from the outside that the special role is won when the main control unit 41 is restarted. In addition, it is possible to effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing a slot machine set in a state in which a special role is won using a driving tool to a player at the start of business at a game shop or the like.

  Further, the notification effect is continuously executed until a winning determination command indicating the winning of the special role is received, that is, until the winning special role is won. For this reason, until the special role wins, that is, until the winning flag of the special role is cleared, the notification effect will not stop, and it is not possible to cancel the notification effect while maintaining the special role win by the amusement store. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing slot machines that are set in a state in which a special role is won using a driving tool to a player at the start of business at a game shop, etc. it can.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, the main CPU 41a returns to the state before the power interruption and the special CPU is elected before the power interruption. When the sub-control unit 91 transmits a command and receives a power-on command indicating that the special role is won, the sub-control unit 91 controls the liquid crystal display 51 and the effect LED 52 that control the notification effect indicating that the special role is won. , Such as speakers 53, 54, reel LED 55, etc., even if the special role is won illegally, when the main control unit 41 is restarted, the special role is won. Since the production device is informed that it is in progress, it becomes easier to distinguish, so the slot machine set in the state where the special role is won using the driving tool is given to the player at the start of operation of the amusement store. Offer It is possible to more reliably prevent illegal sales, such as to.

  In this embodiment, the special device winning is notified by the effect device controlled by the sub-control unit 91. However, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and When the special role is elected before the interruption of power, the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, and the payout display 13 directly controlled by the main control unit 41 may notify the special role. good. In addition, a notification LED for notifying the winning of the special role is provided as an electronic component that is directly controlled by the main control unit 41. When the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is selected before the power interruption. In this case, the notification LED may be used to notify the winning of the special role.

  Further, in this embodiment, the connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection between the electronic control component (inserted medal sensor 31) that inputs or outputs a signal to the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 as the game progresses. The use of unauthorized devices is also prevented by restricting the release of connections between the connectors, but when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is elected before the power interruption. In this case, it is possible to prevent the use of a driving tool regardless of whether or not a structure for restricting the insertion / removal between the connectors is used, so that the structure for restricting the insertion / removal between the connectors is not used. By doing so, it is not necessary to change the structure of parts in order to regulate the insertion and removal of connectors, and maintainability in the event of a failure, etc. It can be improved.

  Based on the reception of the door command, the sub CPU 91a issues a door opening notification indicating that the front door 1b is opened. Specifically, when the sub CPU 91a receives a door command, if no new door command is received after 100 ms, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the received door command is confirmed and detected. If the confirmation detection state is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed. In the door opening notification, the effect effect LED 52 blinks, the door opening notification screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and an error warning sound is output. After that, the door command is received, and even if 100 ms elapses, the door command is not received and the detection state indicated by the door command becomes the definite detection state. If the definite detection state is OFF (door closed), the door is opened. Stops the notification and returns to the original performance.

  In addition, when a door command is newly received within 100 ms after the last door command is received, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the previously received command is not set as the definite detection state. If no door command is received even after 100 ms after receiving a new door command, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the last received door command is set as the detection state, and the determination detection state is If it is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed, and if the definite detection state is OFF (door closed), the door open notification is stopped.

  For this reason, even if a door command indicating that the door opening detection switch 25 is ON (door opening) is received in a state where the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening detection switch 25 is turned OFF (door closing) within 100 ms. When the door command is received, the door opening notification is not performed, and even when the door command indicating that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF (door closed) is received in the state where the door opening notification is being performed, 100 ms thereafter. If the door command indicating ON of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening) is received within, the door opening notification is not stopped.

  In addition, when a door command is received continuously within an interval of 100 ms, such as when a new door command is received within 100 ms after receiving a door command and then a new door command is received within 100 ms thereafter. In the meantime, the state of the door opening notification is maintained (if the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening notification is not started, and if the door opening notification is performed, it is continued) After the last received door command, the door opening notification state is determined based on the detection state determined when 100 ms elapses, the door opening notification has been performed so far, and the determined detection state is ON (door opening) If the detected state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is stopped while the door is open until then. If the detection is not performed and the determined detection state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is not performed. If the determined detection state is ON (door opening), the door opening notification is started. .

  Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 41a only transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and determines whether or not the front door 1b is opened from the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command received from the main CPU 41a, and based on the determination result. The door opening notification is performed.

  The front door 1b needs to be opened in order to perform some illegal act on the parts inside the slot machine 1 such as the game control board 40, but in this embodiment, when the front door 1b is opened, that fact Therefore, such fraud can be effectively prevented and can be detected early even if fraud is made.

  Conventionally, in the case of notifying the opening of the front door, the game control is performed based on the signal input to the game control means in spite of the fact that the effect control means performs error notification in order to reduce the control load of the game control means. It is necessary for the means to determine whether or not the front door has been opened, and the control load on the game control means cannot be reduced sufficiently.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the main CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms, and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes, the door showing the detection state after the change. Only by transmitting a command, it is not determined whether the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and the sub CPU 91a detects the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command received from the main CPU 41a. It is determined whether or not the front door 1b is open based on the detected state of the door, and the door open notification is performed based on the determination result, so the main CPU 41a notifies the opening of the front door 1b. In determining whether or not the front door 1b is open from the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 (door open detection switch Chi chattering prevention determination of 25) it is not necessary to perform, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main CPU 41a.

  Even when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has not changed, the main CPU 41a transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at that time when the main CPU 41a is activated and when one game is over. Therefore, even when the sub CPU 91a misses the door command at the time of change, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 can be always acquired at the time of starting and at the end of one game. Even if the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 does not change after the failure, the state in which the change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is not reflected in the door opening notification can be prevented from continuing.

  In addition, the main CPU 41a, as a general rule, when the transmission of the door command is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set) when the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is given priority over the command stored in the command transmission buffer, and the monitoring interval of the door open detection switch 25 and the transmission of the door command are transmitted. The error of the interval can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In the normal command transmission waiting state (during delay) stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the delayed normal command is given priority over the door command, and the delay time has already been reached. Even though the timing is started, the delay control is not complicated by interrupting the timing. Further, the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with priority over all commands including the door command, and the return of the sub CPU 91a is delayed by transmitting other commands first. There is nothing.

  In this embodiment, once the door command transmission request 2 for commanding the transmission of the door command is set once, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes until the door command based on the command is transmitted. The door command is not updated, and even when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 changes while waiting for transmission of the power-on command or the initialization command, the door command is overwritten without being transmitted. Can be prevented.

  Also, in this embodiment, a door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and transmission management becomes complicated when the door command is transmitted with priority over the normal command. There is no end.

  In this embodiment, the door command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, whereas the normal command is transmitted in the basic process. When storing door commands and normal commands in the same transmission buffer, it is necessary to disable interrupts when storing normal commands in the transmission buffer. If a door command is stored while interrupting while being stored in the transmission buffer, the normal command being processed will be overwritten, and the door command will be partially overwritten after returning. In such a configuration, interrupts are prohibited every time a normal command is stored, causing blurring of reel rotation and medals to be paid out. However, as described above, the door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer as described above. It is necessary to prohibit interrupts when storing normal commands, even if the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the basic processing, and stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt processing (main) executed by interrupt. This eliminates the above problems.

  In this embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 until the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted after the door command is transmitted. Therefore, even when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 is continuously changed, the next door command is transmitted after the door command is transmitted. In the meantime, at least one normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer can be transmitted, so that the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the single BET switch 5, the MAX BET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 are operated based on the reception of the operation detection command. Specifically, when the sub CPU 91a receives an operation detection command, if no new operation detection command is received after 100 ms, the detection state of each switch indicated by the received operation detection command is confirmed and detected. If any of the switches has changed from the OFF state to the ON state as compared to the previous fixed detection state, it is determined that the corresponding switch has been operated, and any of the switches is OFF. If the state has changed to the ON state, it is determined that the operation of the corresponding switch has been released.

  For this reason, even when an operation detection command is received and the detection state of any switch has changed, if an operation detection command indicating the same detection state as before the change is received within 100 ms, The operation or release of the operation is not determined.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, the detection state of the checkout switch 10, that is, ON / OFF, these switches are in progress of the game. Whether an operation detection command indicating whether the switch is in a valid state or an invalid state is valid for the progress of the game when the switch detection state changes. The sub CPU 91a can identify the operation detected by the main CPU 41a regardless of whether or not the operation is valid, so that one sheet is transmitted. Operation of BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and settlement switch 10 In addition to the timing when it is enabled and the game control progresses, when the operation of these switches is disabled, that is, the performance is executed at a timing not directly related to the control of the game progress. It becomes possible.

  In other words, in order to perform a production operation, a new detection means is not installed, but the operation means is originally installed for advancing the game and detected by the main CPU 41a. It is possible to perform operations for performance even in a disabled state in progress, and the sub CPU 91a can perform performance using the operations of these operation means, so that the timing of the performance can be varied. You can have it.

  In addition, it is possible to specify whether the operation of each switch is valid or invalid from the operation detection command, and the sub CPU 91a operates the switch when receiving the operation detection command. An appropriate effect can be executed depending on whether or not the reception period is valid.

  Further, when transmitting the operation detection command, the main CPU 41a transmits an operation detection command indicating the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10. However, it is not determined whether or not the switch is operated based on the detection state. The sub CPU 91a determines that the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the like based on the detection state indicated by the operation detection command received from the main CPU 41a. Since it is determined whether the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R and the checkout switch 10 are operated and the operation status of these switches can be grasped based on the determination result, the main CPU 41a Send operation detection command Therefore, it is not necessary to determine whether or not a switch in an invalid period, that is, a switch that is not related to the progress control of the game is operated (e.g., chattering prevention determination), and the control load on the main CPU 41a is reduced. can do.

  Further, the main CPU 41a, when the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, when transmission of the operation detection command is requested (when the operation detection command transmission request is set), or the door command When transmission and operation detection command transmission are requested at the same time, as a rule, commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer or door command transmission rather than operation detection commands stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer are sent. The door command stored in the trust buffer is preferentially transmitted, and the transmission of the normal command and the door command is not delayed by the transmission of the operation detection command.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer while waiting for transmission of an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer (during delay), or when transmission of a door command is requested In this case, the operation detection command during the delay is transmitted with priority, and the delay control is not complicated by interrupting it even though the delay time has already started. .

  Further, in this embodiment, once an operation detection command transmission request for instructing transmission of an operation detection command is set, the detection state of any switch changes until an operation detection command based on the command is transmitted. However, the operation detection command is not updated, and the operation detection command can be prevented from being overwritten without being transmitted.

  In this embodiment, an operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer and the door command transmission buffer, and the normal command and the door command are transmitted with priority over the operation detection command. In this case, the transmission management does not become complicated.

  In this embodiment, the operation detection command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, whereas the normal command is transmitted in the basic process. Since it is configured to store in the buffer, if the operation detection command and the normal command are stored in the same transmission buffer, it is necessary to prohibit interrupts when storing the normal command in the transmission buffer (normally If an operation detection command is stored while the command is being stored in the transmission buffer, the normal command being processed will be overwritten, and the operation detection command will be partially overwritten after returning. In such a configuration, interrupts are prohibited every time a normal command is stored, causing reel rotation fluctuations and However, it may affect other controls such as blurring at the time of paying out the command. However, as described above, the operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer. Even when the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interruption process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the basic process. It is no longer necessary to prohibit interrupts, and the above problems can be solved.

  The sub CPU 91a and the touch panel controller 99 are connected so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication.

  The sub CPU 91a instructs the touch panel controller 99 to perform a hardware reset at the time of activation, initializes the touch panel controller 99, analyzes the status report transmitted from the touch panel controller 99 upon completion of the initialization, and detects an abnormality. If not, a system-on command is transmitted to activate the touch panel controller 99 system. Accordingly, the touch panel controller 99 shifts to a state in which a touch operation can be detected.

  In addition, when the response to the command transmitted to the touch panel controller 99 is not returned even after a certain period of time, even when the sub CPU 91a is not activated, the sub CPU 91a instructs the hardware reset of the touch panel controller 99 similarly to the activation. The system is supposed to restart.

  The touch panel controller 99 determines that the corresponding beam coordinate is a defective beam when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is blocked for 60 seconds continuously based on the signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b. Thereafter, the detection of the touch operation at the beam coordinates determined as the defective beam is invalidated, and the detection of the touch operation is performed only with the activated beam. After that, when the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released, the detection of the touch operation at the invalidated beam coordinates is enabled again.

  As described above, the touch panel controller 99 determines that the beam is defective when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is blocked continuously for 60 seconds, and invalidates the corresponding beam coordinates. If the light receiving devices 57a, 57b and the light emitting devices 56a, 56b are damaged, if a solid object is attached, or if a defective beam is generated due to the object being placed, only the defective beam is invalidated, The touch operation can be detected by an effective beam, so that the touch panel can function normally even if a defective beam occurs. The touch panel can be used even though the touch operation can be detected by a normal beam. It can be prevented from disappearing.

  In this embodiment, the invalid beam coordinates determined to be a defective beam are validated when the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released, and are automatically restored. However, for example, the touch panel controller 99 may be restored upon a hardware reset or the like.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a transmits a defective beam analysis request command every second. When the touch panel controller 99 receives the defective beam analysis request command, the touch panel controller 99 returns a report indicating the shielded beam and the shielding time among the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. Then, when the report returned from the touch panel controller 99 indicates that there are two or more continuous beams that have been shielded for 10 seconds or longer, the sub CPU 91a causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display Please display "and notify the user to remove the object on the touch panel.

  Thus, when there are two or more continuous beams that are shielded for a certain period of time among the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b, that is, when there is a possibility that an object is located on the touch panel, Since the notification for prompting the removal is performed, a defective beam due to the presence of these objects can be detected and eliminated at an early stage.

  In addition, since the notification that prompts the removal of the object is performed at an earlier stage than the time until the beam coordinates associated with the defective beam are invalidated, the cause of the defective beam can be removed before the beam coordinates are invalidated. It becomes possible.

  It should be noted that the sub CPU 91a notifies the user that the object is to be removed, and then returns a report indicating that there are no two or more consecutive beams that are shielded for 10 seconds or more, that is, the object. Is removed and the defective beam is eliminated, or when a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed, that is, when an object is left on or the light receiving devices 57a and 57b and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are damaged. In this case, the notification is stopped.

  The effect control board 90 of the present embodiment can perform an operation test of each part mounted on the effect control board 90 by connecting a command simulator (test game control board) before shipment.

  In the operation test, an inspection command specifying a component to be operated by the command simulator and its operation mode is transmitted.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with LED, lamp, cold-cathode tube and other electrical components, a speaker, a liquid crystal display 51, and a touch panel controlled by the sub-control unit 91. An output port and its output port It is possible to inspect the operation of the designated part by designating the part corresponding to 1 and its operation mode by the inspection command. The inspection command is composed of 2 bytes. The output port is designated by the first byte, and the component to be operated and the operation mode are designated by the second byte.

  In the inspection command that inspects the operation of the lighting component, you can specify lighting and extinguishing as the operation mode, and if the lighting component can turn on multiple colors, you can also specify the lighting color It is.

  In the inspection command to inspect the operation of the speaker, as the operation mode, the output from both left and right only, the type of sound to be output, and the ROM check of the sound ROM (ROM that stores sound data output from the speaker) Can be specified.

  In the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the liquid crystal display 51, the operation mode includes color bar display, red display, green display, blue display, white display, black display, electrostatic test screen display, CGROM (liquid crystal display 51 ROM check of image data (CG data to be displayed on CG), display area check of liquid crystal display 51, display of image data A to D stored in CGROM, and check of VRAM. Is possible.

  In the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the touch panel, it is possible to specify a defective beam check of the touch panel and an operation check of the touch panel as operation modes. When the touch panel defect check is designated, the voice ROM and CGROM ROM checks are also designated at the same time.

  As another inspection command, there is an inspection command for confirming the backup of the bonus medium effect. In this inspection command, the display of the bonus medium screen, the operation of the electrical components in the bonus, and the BGM output in the bonus are designated.

  In one inspection command, it is possible to specify only one output port, components corresponding to the output port, and operation modes, and when different components of the output port are operated simultaneously and inspected, Send inspection commands with specified ports continuously. For this reason, it is necessary to transmit 40 inspection commands continuously even if only the test for operating all the electrical parts is performed, and the operation of parts other than the electrical parts is also tested at the same time. In some cases, it is necessary to continuously transmit a maximum of 128 inspection commands according to the combination.

  Note that in the command simulator, an inspection command for designating the operation of a plurality of illumination parts, an examination command for designating the operation of the illumination parts, an inspection command for designating the operation of the speaker, and an inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 The inspection command for designating the operation of the speaker and the inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 can be transmitted simultaneously, but the liquid crystal display 51 different from the inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 can be transmitted. It is not possible to simultaneously transmit operation commands that specify operations that cannot be performed simultaneously, such as inspection commands that specify the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 and inspection commands that specify the operation of the touch panel. It has become.

  As described above, if an operation associated with a normal game is being performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is the next command even when commands are continuously transmitted from the main CPU 41a. Since it is read out by the timer interrupt process (sub) before reception, a plurality of unprocessed commands are not stored in the reception buffer. However, in the operation test by the command simulator, a maximum of 128 inspection commands are continuously recorded. Since there is a possibility of transmission, an area capable of storing 128 commands is provided in the reception buffer of the RAM 91c.

  The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer in the timer interrupt process (sub). The read command is read out, and it is determined whether or not the read command is an inspection command. As a result, when the read command is an inspection command, the component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode are specified, and the specified component is operated in the specified operation mode. As a result, the operation status based on the inspection command transmitted from the command simulator can be confirmed from the outside.

  When the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the electrical component, the sub CPU 91a identifies the electrical component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode such as lighting, extinction, and lighting color, and designates the corresponding electrical component. The operation is performed in the mode described above.

  When the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the speaker, the operation designated by the inspection command such as output from both the left only, the right only from both the left and right, the type of sound to be output, and the ROM check of the audio ROM The mode is specified, and the speaker is operated in the specified operation mode. In particular, when the ROM check of the voice ROM is designated, the confirmation data stored in the voice ROM is compared with the stored data stored in the ROM 91b, and the result of whether or not they match is determined. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the liquid crystal display 51, the display of the color bar, red display, green display, blue display, white display, black display, and electrostatic test screen is displayed. The operation mode specified by the inspection command such as the CGROM ROM check, the display area check of the liquid crystal display 51, the display of the image data A to D stored in the CGROM, the VRAM check is specified, and the liquid crystal display 51 is specified. It operates in the mode of operation. In particular, when the ROM check of the CGROM is designated, the confirmation data stored in the CGROM is compared with the stored data stored in the ROM 91b as in the case of the ROM check of the audio ROM. The result of whether or not to do so is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the display area check of the liquid crystal display 51 is designated, an image showing the displayable area is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the VRAM check is designated, the VRAM is expanded in the memory area and an image for VRAM check is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the touch panel, the sub CPU 91a specifies an operation mode designated by the inspection command such as a check for a defective beam on the touch panel and an operation check on the touch panel, Operate in the specified operation mode. In particular, when a check for a defective beam on the touch panel is designated, a defective beam analysis request command is transmitted to the touch panel controller 99, and whether there is a beam that is blocked for 60 seconds or more based on the returned report. If there is a beam that is shielded for 60 seconds or longer, a red line is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in correspondence with the shielded beam. In addition, when the check of the defective beam of the touch panel is designated, the voice ROM and the CGROM are also checked. In addition, there are two types of touch panel operation checks. When operation check 1 is specified, the touch panel is fully activated, a ticker “Please touch” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and a touch operation is detected. It is prohibited to receive new commands until When the operation check 2 is designated, the entire touch panel is enabled, and a 64 divided screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the color of the frame where the touch operation is detected is changed. Also in this case, reception of a new command is prohibited until a touch operation is detected.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives the inspection command for inspecting the backup of the bonus medium effect, the sub CPU 91a specifies the part and operation mode specified by the inspection command, and the operation in which the liquid crystal display 51, the speaker, and the electrical decoration part are specified. Operate in a manner.

  As described above, the sub CPU 91a identifies the component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode based on the reception of the inspection command, and operates the identified component in the specified operation mode. The operation status based on the inspection command transmitted from the simulator can be confirmed from the outside.

  In general, the effect control means has the same number of reception buffers as the transmission buffers of the game control means, and the number of transmission buffers and the number of reception buffers are such that there is no overflow in the case of a normal game. Therefore, as long as the game is played normally, more commands than the reception buffer are not transmitted continuously, and the command transmitted from the game control means overflows. There is no. However, in the operation test for inspecting whether or not the production control means operates normally during development or before shipment as described above, a large number of commands are connected by connecting the test game control means to the production control means. It is possible to increase the efficiency of the operation test by continuously transmitting the message, but if the number of reception buffers is the same as the number of transmission buffers as described above, a large number of commands are transmitted during the operation test. There is a risk that the reception buffer overflows and the operation test cannot be performed accurately. For this reason, it is necessary to increase the number of commands or transmission intervals transmitted continuously during the operation test, and as a result, there arises a problem that the efficiency of the operation test cannot be sufficiently increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub-control unit 91 is stored in the reception buffer that stores the command received by the sub-control unit 91 from the main control unit 41. A storage area capable of storing a larger number of commands than the command storage area of the command transmission buffer is provided. Accordingly, when an operation test board such as a command simulator is connected to the effect control board 90 and an operation test is performed, the number of inspection commands that can be transmitted at one time and the transmission interval can be transmitted even when the inspection commands are continuously transmitted. However, the number of storage areas of the normal command transmission buffer provided in the main control unit 41, that is, the number of storage areas allocated as many as possible so as not to overflow assuming a normal game (16 commands in this embodiment) The number of test commands can be continuously transmitted up to the limit of the receiving buffer storage area (128 commands in this embodiment) without being limited according to the efficiency of the operation test. Can be effectively increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, for each inspection command, a plurality of lighting parts, liquid crystal display 51, touch panel and other effect parts can be individually designated and an operation test can be performed. By transmitting an inspection command for designating each production component such as a certain electrical decoration component, liquid crystal display 51, and touch panel, it is possible to accurately inspect whether or not each production component operates normally.

  In the present embodiment, when an operation test is performed in the slot machine 1, it is possible to specify only one output port, a production component corresponding to the output port, and an operation mode thereof with one inspection command. Therefore, a storage area that can store a larger number of commands based on the number of output ports is provided in the storage area of the reception buffer, and operation tests of all the production parts are performed collectively. In this case, even when the inspection commands corresponding to the respective output ports are continuously transmitted, the reception buffer does not overflow, so that the operation test can be performed more efficiently.

  In this embodiment, it is possible to specify only one output port, a production component corresponding to the output port and its operation mode with one inspection command, but with one inspection command, It may be possible to specify only one performance component and its operation correspondence. In this case, by providing a storage area in the reception buffer that can store more commands than the number of performance components, When performing production component operation tests in a batch, even if inspection commands corresponding to each production component are sent continuously, the reception buffer does not overflow, so the operation test is more efficient. It can be performed.

  In the gaming machine in which the production control means controls the production according to the operation of the production operation means such as a touch panel as in the present embodiment, it is necessary to inspect the detection status of the operation of the production operation means. If the next inspection command is mistakenly transmitted before the operation is detected, the next inspection command is received without waiting for the detection of the operation of the operation means for production, and the next operation test is performed. There is a problem that the detection of the operation detection status of the operation means for production cannot be normally performed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91a according to the present embodiment receives the inspection command designating the touch panel operation check and performs the touch panel operation check, the sub CPU 91a performs the command reception interrupt process until the touch operation is detected. During this period, new commands are not received, and even if a new command is transmitted during this period, the new command is not detected until the touch operation is detected and the operation check is completed. It is not received and processing based on the command is not performed. Therefore, when transmitting test commands by mistake without waiting for completion of the operation check of the touch panel can also be a successful inspection of the operation check of the touch panel.

The sub CPU 91a not only prohibits command reception interrupt processing but also stores it in the reception buffer until a touch operation is detected after receiving an inspection command designating an operation check of the touch panel. Even if the command is already received and the received command is stored in the reception buffer, the touch operation is detected and the operation check is completed. The processing based on the command stored in the reception buffer is not performed. Therefore, continuous inspection command for designating the operation check of the touch panel even when other test command is sent, can be a successful test operation check of the touch panel.

In this embodiment, the touch panel is applied as the production operation means. However, production operation means other than the touch panel, such as buttons and dials, may be applied, and operation checks other than the production operation means other than the touch panel may be performed. Even in the case of performing the operation check, even if the inspection command is erroneously transmitted without waiting for the completion of the operation check by prohibiting the reception of the command until the operation of the effect operating means is detected in the same manner as described above . The inspection can be performed normally, and the command stored in the reception buffer is not read out until the operation of the production operation means is detected, so that another inspection command specifying the operation check is continuously performed. If the test command is also sent, it can be inspected operation check properly.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the specified number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined, and the specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the gaming state includes a challenge time (hereinafter referred to as CT), a normal gaming state, RT (1) (replay time (1)), RT (2) (replay time (2) ), RT (3) (replay time (3)), but 3 is defined as the prescribed number of bets in any gaming state. Therefore, regardless of whether the gaming state is CT, the normal gaming state, or RT (1) to RT (3), the game can be started when 3 is set as the bet number. It becomes possible. In this embodiment, the winning line L is activated when a specified number of bets corresponding to the gaming state are set.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment is awarded when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped and a combination of symbols called “comb” is arranged on the winning line L. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition of the game state. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c. If the gaming state is CT, the winning flags of all the small roles are always set in the RAM 41c regardless of the result of the internal lottery, so that the small role can be won regardless of the result of the internal lottery. Is possible.

  Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until the combination of combinations permitted by the flag is complete, and is invalid in a game having the combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the winning flag for a special role is won, even if the combination of characters allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  As the role in this slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 15, challenge bonuses (1) to (4) (hereinafter referred to as CB (1) to (4)) as special roles, and 15 (1 ) To (12) and 15 (A) to (C) are defined as replays (1) to (13). CB (1) to (4), CB (1) + Replay (1), CB (2) + Replay (1), CB (3) + Replay (1), CB (4) + replay (1), replay (1) + replay (2) + replay (3) + replay (4) + replay (5) (hereinafter referred to as replay GR (1)), replay (1) + Replay (6) + Replay (7) + Replay (8) + Replay (9) (hereinafter referred to as Replay GR (2)), Replay (1) + Replay (10) + Replay (11) + Replay (12 ) + Replay (13) (hereinafter referred to as Replay GR (3)), Replay (14), 15 (1) +15 (A) (hereinafter referred to as small role GR (1)), 15 (2 ) +15 sheets (A) (hereinafter referred to as small role GR (2)), 15 sheets ( ) +15 sheets (A) (hereinafter referred to as small role GR (3)), 15 sheets (4) +15 sheets (A) (hereinafter referred to as small role GR (4)), 15 sheets (5) +15 sheets ( B) (hereinafter referred to as small role GR (5)), 15 sheets (6) + 15 sheets (B) (hereinafter referred to as small role GR (6)), 15 sheets (7) + 15 sheets (B) (hereinafter referred to as , Small role GR (7)), 15 sheets (8) +15 sheets (B) (hereinafter referred to as small role GR (8)), 15 sheets (9) +15 sheets (C) (hereinafter, small role GR) (9)), 15 sheets (10) +15 sheets (C) (hereinafter referred to as small role GR (10)), 15 sheets (11) +15 sheets (C) (hereinafter referred to as small role GR (11)) 15 sheets (12) +15 sheets (C) (hereinafter referred to as small role GR (12)).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the combination of combinations and combinations of combinations that are subject to lottery differ depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1) to RT (3), or CT. . Furthermore, depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (2), RT (1) other than carrying over, RT (3), RT (1) carrying over, The combination of roles is different.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1) (2), and no special role is carried over (the normal gaming state, RT (1) (2) as will be described later). When the special role is won in RT (3), the game moves to RT (3), so that in the normal gaming state, the special role is not carried over in RT (1) (2)), CB (1) to (4), CB (1 ) + Replay (1), CB (2) + Replay (1), CB (3) + Replay (1), CB (1) + Replay (4), Replay GR (1) to (3), Replay (14) ), Small roles GR (1) to (12) are targeted for internal lottery.

  In addition, the gaming state is RT (3) or RT (1), and any special combination is carried over (when the special combination is won in the normal gaming state as described later, or in RT (2) When a special role is elected, it will be transferred to RT (3) when the special role is won at the end of RT (1), so the special role is always carried over in RT (3)). GR (1) to (3), replay (14), and small roles GR (1) to (12) are targeted for internal lottery.

  Fifteen (1) are awarded when the combination of “black 7-bell-bell” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out. Fifteen cards (2) are awarded when the combination of “net 7-bell-bell” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out. Fifteen (3) wins when the combination of “white 7-bell-bell” is aligned on the pay line L in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out. Fifteen cards (4) are awarded when the combination of “BAR-bell-bell” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out.

  Fifteen cards (5) are awarded when the combination of “bell-black 7-bell” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out. Fifteen cards (6) are awarded when the combination of “bell-net 7-bell” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out. Fifteen (7) wins when the combination of “bell-white 7-bell” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out. Fifteen (8) wins when the combination of “Bell-BAR-Bell” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out.

  Fifteen cards (9) are awarded when the combination of “bell-bell-black 7” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out. Fifteen cards (10) are awarded when the combination of “bell-bell-net 7” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out. Fifteen (11) wins when the combination of “bell-bell-white 7” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out. Fifteen (12) are awarded when the combination of “Bell-Bell-BAR” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out.

Fifteen (A) are awarded when the combination of “Bell-Replay-Replay” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out. Fifteen cards (B) are awarded when the combination of “replay-bell-replay” is arranged on the winning line L in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out. Fifteen (C) wins when the combination of “Replay-Replay-Bell” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out.

  Replay (1) is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state. Replay (2) is awarded when the winning line L has a combination of “black 7-replay-replay” in any gaming state. Replay (3) is awarded when a combination of “net 7-replay-replay” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state. Replay (4) is awarded when the combination of “white 7-replay-replay” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state. Replay (5) is awarded when the combination of “BAR-Replay-Replay” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state.

  Replay (6) is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Black 7-Replay” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state. Replay (7) is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Network 7-Replay” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state. Replay (8) is awarded when the combination of “Replay-White 7-Replay” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state. Replay (9) is awarded when the combination of “Replay-BAR-Replay” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state.

  Replay (10) is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Replay-Black 7” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state. Replay (11) is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Replay-Net 7” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state. Replay (12) is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Replay-White 7” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state. Replay (13) is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Replay-BAR” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state.

  Replay (14) is awarded when the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned on the winning line L in any gaming state.

  In CT, the combination of replays (1) to (14) does not stop on the winning line L.

  When replays (1) to (14) are won, there is no payout of medals, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again, so 3 corresponding to the number of bets that need not be set in the next game. This is essentially the same as a medal being paid out.

  CB is a combination of “Black 7-White 7-Net 7”, “Black 7-White 7-Black 7”, and “Watermelon-Replay-Watermelon” on any of the winning lines in gaming states other than CT , "Watermelon-Watermelon-Replay" is awarded when the combination is complete. In this embodiment, CB (1) is the winning CB when the combination of “black 7-white 7-net 7” is aligned, and the winning is achieved when the combination of “black 7-white 7-black 7” is aligned. CB will be CB (2), CB (3) will be awarded when the combination of "Watermelon-Replay-Watermelon" is complete, and a prize will be awarded when the combination of "Watermelon-Watermelon-Replay" is complete Let CB (4) be CB.

  When CB (1) wins, the gaming state shifts to CB (1), when CB (2) wins, the gaming state shifts to CB (2), and when CB (3) wins, the gaming state changes to CB. When the process proceeds to (3) and CB (4) wins, the gaming state shifts to CB (4). When transitioning to CB (1) to (4), transition to CT is performed simultaneously with transition to CB (1) to (4). CT is limited to a predetermined specific reel (left reel in this embodiment), but the drawing range of the symbols is limited as compared to the normal gaming state, but all the small roles are allowed to be won and the small roles are awarded. This is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and is completed in one game. If the CB (1) to (4) are not completed when the CT is completed, the process proceeds to the CT again, and the CT is repeatedly controlled until the CB (1) to (4) is completed. That is, during (1) to (4), it is always controlled to CT.

  Then, CB (1) (3) ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the CB exceeds 253, and CB (2) (4) is sent to the player in the CB. The process ends when the total number of medals paid out exceeds 100.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 16383) is acquired as described later. And, for each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state and the number of bets, the obtained random numbers for internal lottery and combinations of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state, the number of bets and the set value This is performed according to the number of determination values. In this embodiment, based on the number of judgment values for each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values for each of the general combination and special combination, and a range of determination values for the combination of general combination and special combination is won. And the winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and a general combination and a special combination may be won simultaneously in one game. However, for special roles of different types, the range of determination values to be won in duplicate is not specified, and special types of different types are exclusively drawn.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1) (2), and no special role is carried over, CB (1) to (4), CB (1) + replay (1), CB ( 2) + Replay (1), CB (3) + Replay (1), CB (1) + Replay (4), Replay GR (1) to (3), Replay (14), Small part GR (1) to (12) is sequentially read out as a target combination of the internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is RT (3) or RT (1) and any special role is carried over, replay GR (1) to (3), replay (14), small role GR (1) to (12) is sequentially read out as a target combination of the internal lottery.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of roles that are the subject of the internal lottery and the current gaming state are sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery, and when the result of the addition overflows, Or it is determined that the combination of the winning combination is won.

  When a winning combination of any combination or combination of combinations is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the combination of combination or combination determined to be selected is set in the internal winning flag storage work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the winning flag for the special role is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special combination is won, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. In addition, when a special role + general role is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storage work, and a general role winning indicating that the general role is won Set the flag in the general role storage work. When a general combination is won, a winning flag for the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination is selected, only the general winning combination work is cleared. Further, if the gaming state is CT, a winning flag indicating that all small roles have been won is set in the general role storing work.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.

  The main CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the rotation of the reel starts and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to and the slip of the referred stop control table is referred to. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Note that even if the winning status of the combination is different, the same control is applied (for example, when CB (1) + replay (1) is won and when CB (2) + replay (1) is won The same address is stored as the index data, and in such a case, the stop control table is created by referring to the same table creation data. Become.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of sliding frames according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of each, and it is necessary according to each status from this specified address. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the reel stop status and the stopped position of the stopped reel are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed. In this embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 16 steps (number of steps in which one symbol moves) are defined for one reel, and these areas are areas 1 to 21 from the reel reference position. A number is assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 1 to 21 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 1 to 21 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 1 to 21 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of sliding symbols for each area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of sliding symbols for each area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3). Sliding frame when an operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected at a timing (a timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number). It is a table with each number set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the table creation data, and the stop control table address of the unreacted reel corresponding to the stopped reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. The stop control table for each stored reel is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the main CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel will be described. When one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop operation position area is determined based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. The number is specified, the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected is referred, and the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired sliding frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of sliding frames to the stop is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of sliding frames from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 It will stop in the lower symbol area).

  In the table index of this embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and further, one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). In other words, table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and stop control tables corresponding to reel stop states (and stopped positions of stopped reels) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the stop control table used for the gaming state other than CT and the reels other than the left reel during CT has a value of 0 to 4 as the number of sliding symbols, and the stop operation is detected. It is possible to stop the reel by drawing a maximum of 4 frame symbols from. That is, in a gaming state other than CT and a reel other than the left reel during CT, a symbol stop position can be specified from a range of a maximum of five frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, the stop control table used for the left reel during CT has a value of 0 or 1 as the number of sliding frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of one frame symbol after detecting the stop operation. Is possible. That is, on the left reel during CT, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from the range of a maximum of two frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame in order to move the reel for one symbol, a maximum of four symbols are drawn after detecting a stop operation in a gaming state other than CT and a reel other than the left reel during CT. The reel can be stopped, and the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of up to 5 symbols including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. For the left reel during CT, the stop operation is detected. The reel can be stopped by drawing in a maximum of one symbol, and the stop position of the symbol can be designated from the range of a maximum of two symbols including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected.

  In this embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won in a gaming state other than CT, when the stop operation is performed, the winning combination is a winning range of up to four frames on the winning line L. If they can be stopped together, control is performed to stop them evenly, and a winning combination that is not won will be controlled to be stopped within a maximum of 4 frames.

  When a small role is won in a game state other than CT where a special role has been carried over from before the previous game (CB (1) + small role GR (1), etc.), when a stop operation is performed If a special role that has been elected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames can be stopped on the winning line L, it is controlled to stop the same, and the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line L is controlled. If you can not pull in the special role that is won in the winning line L, if you can stop and stop the winning combination in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, The winning combination that has been made and has not been won will be controlled to be stopped within the drawing range of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the special combination on the winning line L over the small combination, and the small combination can be won only when the special combination cannot be drawn.

  In this example, if the special role and the small role are elected at the same time, such as when the special role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, it will be won more than the selected small role. If the special role is given priority and the special role cannot be withdrawn, control is performed to align the small role on the winning line. However, if the special role and the small role are elected at the same time, the special role is smaller than the special role. Control for aligning the winning combination on the winning line is given priority, and control for aligning the special winning combination on the winning line may be performed only when the small winning combination cannot be drawn.

  In the game state other than CT, the special role and the re-playing role are won at the same time, such as when the re-playing role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or when the special role and the re-playing role are won simultaneously. Control (CB (1) + replay (1), etc.), when the stop operation is performed, a control for stopping the re-gamer symbols on the winning line L within a maximum of 4 frames withdrawn. Is done. As will be described later, the replay (1), which is a replay (1) configuration symbol that is always won when the re-gamer is elected, is within 5 symbols, that is, within 4 frames, for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Since it is arranged at intervals and can be stopped at any position within the pull-in range of 4 frames, if the special combination and re-playing combination are elected at the same time, stop switches 8L, 8C, Regardless of the operation timing of 8R, the re-game players will always win together. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line L has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win.

  When multiple types of re-game players are won at the same time (replay GR (1) to (3)), at the time of the first stop, the re-game player's winning design symbol is a symbol other than “Replay” ( If “Black 7” “Net 7” “White 7” “BAR”) is included, control is performed to stop the constituent symbols other than “Replay” within the winning line L with a draw range of up to 4 frames. If the re-playing player's constituent symbols do not include symbols other than “Replay” (“Black 7”, “Net 7”, “White 7”, “BAR”), a maximum of 4 frames will be drawn on the winning line L The control for stopping the “replay” within the range is performed, and after the second stop, the control for stopping the “replay” on the winning line L within the drawing range of up to four frames is performed. That is, in such a case, if the constituent symbol of the re-gamer who is elected only for the first stop includes a symbol other than “Replay”, the symbol other than “Replay” is stopped on the winning line L. Since priority is given to the control to be performed and control to stop “Replay” on the winning line L is given priority after the second stop, a reel including symbols other than “Replay” is selected as the constituent symbol of the winning re-gamer. Only in the case of the first stop, replays (2) to (13) can be won, and in other cases, replay (1) is always won.

  In CT, with regard to the middle and right reels, if a small combination with a high priority can be stopped on the winning line L with a maximum of four winning combinations, it is aligned. If the control to be stopped is performed and a small combination with high priority cannot be drawn on the winning line L with a drawing range of up to 4 frames, a drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line L If you can stop a combination of low-priority winning combinations, you will be controlled to stop them, and re-playing and special roles will have a maximum of 4 frames. Control to stop is performed. On the other hand, for the left reel, if a small combination with a high priority can be stopped on the winning line L within a drawing range of a maximum of one frame, control is performed to align and stop it. If you cannot draw a high-priority role on the winning line L with a maximum draw of 1 frame, you will win a win on the pay line L with a maximum draw of 1 frame. If it is possible to stop a small role with a low priority among them, control is performed so that they are stopped together, and the re-playing role and special role are controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of one frame. Will be. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the high-priority small roles on the winning line, and the low-priority small roles can be awarded only when the high-priority small roles cannot be drawn. It becomes possible. As will be described later, in the left reel, “Black 7”, “Net 7”, “White 7”, “BAR”, “Bell” and “Replay”, which are constituent symbols of the small role, are within 2 symbols, that is, within 1 frame. In the CT, the stop switch 8L by the player, on the condition that the left reel is set to the first stop, can be stopped at any position within the pull-in range of one frame. Regardless of the operation timing of 8C and 8R, one of the small roles will always be won together.

  In a gaming state other than CT, when multiple types of small roles with the same payout number are simultaneously won (small roles GR (1) to (12)), when a stop operation is performed, The combination of the selected small combinations among the small combinations that have been selected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames and the small combination with the higher priority determined according to the first stop reel (small combination GR (1) In (4), 15 sheets (A) when the first stop reel is the left reel, 15 sheets (1) to (4) when the first and second reels are middle and right reels, and in the small roles GR (5) to (8) When the first stop reel is a middle reel, 15 sheets (B), when the left and right reels are 15 sheets (5) to (8), and the small role GR (9) to (12), the first stop reel If it is possible to stop 15 sheets (C) when the right reel is aligned and 15 sheets (9) to (12) when the left and middle reels are aligned, If all the winning combinations cannot be drawn on the winning line L within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, and any of the winning combinations cannot be drawn, they will receive 4 frames. The control for stopping and stopping in the range is performed. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control of aligning the high-priority small roles determined according to the combination of the selected small-sized roles on the winning line and the high-priority small roles. If you are unable to withdraw, no role will be awarded.

  In this embodiment, “Black 7” is stopped on the left reel winning line L, and 15 (1) left reels are awarded when “Bell” is stopped on the right reel winning line L. “Net 7” stops on the line L, and when “Bell” stops on the winning line L of the right reel, 15 (2) will be awarded, and “White 7” stops on the winning line L of the left reel Then, “BAR” stops on the 15 reels (3) or the left reel winning line L when “BELL” stops on the middle reel reel line L, and the middle reel reel line L 15 (4), which is awarded when the “bell” stops, and 15 different (1) to (4) on the left reel winning line L, the “bell” stops, and the middle, right reel wins. 15 cards (15) that will be awarded when "Replay" different from 15 (1) to (4) is stopped on the line L ) And are simultaneously elected (small roles GR (1) to (4)), “Black 7” stops on the winning line L of the middle reel, and “Bell” stops on the winning line L of the left and right reels. 15 sheets (5) that will be awarded when the “S” is selected, “Net 7” stops on the winning line L of the middle reel, and 15 sheets (“Bell” stops when the “bell” stops on the winning line L of the left and right reels ( 6) 15 sheets (7) or middle reel winning line L when “white 7” stops on the middle reel winning line L and “bell” stops on the left or right reel winning line L When “BAR” stops and “Bell” stops on the winning line L of the left and right reels, 15 (8) will be awarded, and 15 (5) to (8) on the winning line L of the middle reel. “Bell”, which is different from), is stopped, and 15 (5) to (8) are different from the left and right reel winning line L. 15 cards (B) that will win when “Play” is stopped are won simultaneously (small roles GR (5) to (8)), and “Black 7” is stopped on the winning line L of the right reel, 15 sheets (9) that will be awarded when the “bell” stops on the left and middle reel winning line L, “net 7” stops on the right reel winning line L, and the left and middle reel winning line L 15 (10) winning when “BELL” stops, “WHITE 7” stops on the winning line L of the right reel, and wins when “BELL” stops on the winning line L of the left and middle reels 15 (11), or “BAR” stops on the winning line L of the right reel, and 15 (12) wins when “BELL” stops on the left, middle reel winning line L, A “bell” different from 15 (9) to (12) stops on the reel winning line L, and the left, middle 15 (C), which will be awarded when a “replay” different from 15 (9) to (12) is stopped, is won at the same time in the winning line L of the game (small role GR (9) to ( 12)).

  If the small role GR (1) (small role GR (2) / (3) / (4)) is elected and the left reel is in the first stop, 15 sheets (A) are formed on the winning line L. When the “bell” to be stopped can be stopped, the control for stopping the “bell” on the winning line L is performed. As shown in FIG. 3, since the “bells” are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the left reel, the small role GR (1) (small role GR (2) / (3) / (4)) is won. However, when the left reel is set to the first stop, the “bells” constituting 15 (A) always stop on the winning line L.

Next, the small role GR (1) (the small role GR (2) / (3) / (4)) is won, and the “bell” constituting 15 (A) on the winning line L of the left reel is stopped. When the middle and right reels are stopped while the player is in a state of being in play, control is performed to stop the “replay” that constitutes 15 cards (A) on the winning line L with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. As shown in FIG. 3, since “replay” is arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the right reel, the small role GR (1) (small role GR (2) / (3) / (4)) Is selected, and when the “bell” constituting 15 (A) is stopped on the winning line L of the left reel and the stop operation of the middle and right reels is performed, 15 (A) is selected. The “replay” to be configured is surely stopped, and the winning line L of the right reel is stopped . That is, when the small role GR (1) (small role GR (2) / (3) / (4)) is won and the left reel is set to the first stop, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated. Regardless of the timing, 15 (A) will always win.

  On the other hand, when the small combination GR (1) (small combination GR (2) / (3) / (4)) is won and the middle reel or the right reel is set to the first stop, a maximum of four on the winning line L Control is performed to stop the “bells” constituting 15 (1) (15 (2) / (3) / (4)) on the winning line L within the frame drawing range. Since the “bell” is arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the middle and right reels, the small role GR (1) (small role GR (2) / (3) / (4)) is elected and the middle reel or When the right reel is in the first stop, the “bell” that makes up 15 (1) (15 (2) / (3) / (4)) on the winning line L of the middle reel or the right reel is always Will stop. Further, in this embodiment, the winning line from which the winning is determined is only the winning line L, and when one of the reels stops, one symbol that can be stopped on the winning line L in the reel is one. If the small role GR (1) (small role GR (2) / (3) / (4)) is elected and the middle reel or the right reel is set to the first stop, the middle reel or the right reel The “replay” that configures 15 (A) on the winning line L does not stop.

Next, the small role GR (1) (the small role GR (2) / (3) / (4)) is won, and the winning line L of the middle reel or the right reel is 15 (1) (15 (2) / (3) / (4)) When the “bell” is stopped, if the left reel is stopped, 15 cards (1 in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line L) ) “Black 7” (15 sheets (2) “net 7” / 15 sheets (3) “white 7” / 15 sheets (4) “BAR”)) If it is possible, “Black 7” (“Net 7” / “White 7” / “BAR”) is stopped on the winning line L, and “Black 7” is drawn on the winning line L with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. ”(“ Net 7 ”/“ white 7 ”/“ BAR ”) cannot be stopped, the symbol that does not match any winning line L will be stopped. It is carried out. Since “black 7” (“net 7” / “white 7” / “BAR”) is arranged with an interval of 5 frames or more on the left reel, the small role GR (1) (small role GR (2) / (3) / (4)) is elected, and the “bell” constituting 15 (1) (15 (2) / (3) / (4)) on the winning line L of the middle reel or the right reel When the left reel is stopped in the stopped state, “black 7” (15 pieces (2) “net 7” / 15 pieces (3) constituting 15 pieces (1) “Black 7” (15 sheets (2)) constituting 15 sheets (1) only when a stop operation is performed within the pull-in range of “White 7” constituting 15 sheets (“BAR” constituting 15 sheets (4)) The “net 7” constituting 15 and “white 7” constituting 15 (3) / “BAR” constituting 15 (4)) are stopped on the winning line L of the left reel. In other words, the small role GR (1) (the small role GR (2) / (3) / (4)) is won and 15 (1) (15 (2) / (15) are placed on the winning line L of the middle reel or the right reel. 3) / (4)) In the state where the “bell” constituting the stop is stopped, when the left reel is stopped, the timing at which the left reel is stopped is “black 7”. On the condition that 15 sheets (1) (15 sheets (2) / (3) / (4)) won, the timing when the left reel was stopped was “Black 7” (“Net 7”). / "White 7" / "BAR"), no winning combination will be won (except when special roles are carried over).

  If a small role GR (5) (small role GR (6) / (7) / (8)) is elected and the middle reel is set to the first stop, 15 sheets (B) are formed on the winning line L. When the “bell” to be stopped can be stopped, the control for stopping the “bell” on the winning line L is performed. As shown in FIG. 3, since the “bells” are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the middle reel, the small role GR (5) (small role GR (6) / (7) / (8)) is won. However, when the middle reel is set to the first stop, the “bell” constituting 15 sheets (B) is surely stopped.

Next, the small role GR (5) (the small role GR (6) / (7) / (8)) is won, and the “bell” constituting 15 (B) on the winning line L of the middle reel stops. In the state where the left and right reels are stopped in a state in which the player is in the game, control is performed to stop the “replay” that configures 15 cards (B) on the winning line L with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. As shown in FIG. 3, “replays” are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the left and right reels, so that the small role GR (5) (small role GR (6) / (7) / (8)) Is selected, and when the left and right reels are stopped while the “bell” constituting 15 (B) is stopped on the winning line L of the middle reel, 15 (B) is selected. The “replay” to be configured always stops at the winning line L of the left and right reels. That is, when the small role GR (5) (small role GR (6) / (7) / (8)) is won and the middle reel is set to the first stop, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated. Regardless of the timing, 15 (B) will always win.

  On the other hand, when the small role GR (5) (small role GR (6) / (7) / (8)) is won and the left reel or the right reel is set to the first stop, a maximum of 4 on the winning line L Control is performed to stop the “bells” constituting 15 (5) (15 (6) / (7) / (8)) on the winning line within the drawing range of the frames. Since the “bells” are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the left and right reels, the small role GR (5) (small role GR (6) / (7) / (8)) is elected and the left reel or When the right reel is in the first stop, the “bell” that makes up 15 (5) (15 (6) / (7) / (8)) on the winning line L of the left reel or the right reel is always Will stop. Further, in this embodiment, the winning line from which the winning is determined is only the winning line L, and when one of the reels stops, one symbol that can be stopped on the winning line L in the reel is one. If the small role GR (5) (small role GR (6) / (7) / (8)) is elected and the left reel or right reel is set to the first stop, the left reel or right reel The “replay” that configures 15 (B) in the winning line L does not stop.

Next, the small role GR (5) (the small role GR (6) / (7) / (8)) is won, and 15 (5) (15 (6) / (7) / (8)) in the state where the “bell” is stopped, if a middle reel is stopped, 15 cards (5 on the winning line L) with a drawing range of up to 4 frames ) “Black 7” (15 sheets (6) “net 7” / 15 sheets (7) “white 7” / 15 sheets (8) “BAR”)) If it is possible, “Black 7” (“Net 7” / “White 7” / “BAR”) is stopped on the winning line L, and “Black 7” is drawn on the winning line L with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. ”(“ Net 7 ”/“ white 7 ”/“ BAR ”) cannot be stopped, the symbol that does not match any winning line L will be stopped. It is carried out. Since “black 7” (“net 7” / “white 7” / “BAR”) is arranged with an interval of 5 frames or more in the middle reel, the small role GR (5) (small role GR (6) / (7) / (8)) is elected, and the “bell” constituting 15 (5) (15 (6) / (7) / (8)) on the winning line L of the left reel or the right reel When the middle reel is stopped in the stopped state, “black 7” (15 pieces (6) “net 7” / 15 pieces (7) constituting 15 pieces (5)) "Black 7" (15 sheets (6)) constituting 15 sheets (5) only when a stop operation is performed within the pull-in range of "White 7" comprising 15 sheets ("BAR" constituting 15 sheets (8)) The “net 7” / 15 sheets (7) “white 7” / 15 sheets (8) “BAR”) are stopped on the winning line L of the middle reel. In other words, the small role GR (5) (the small role GR (6) / (7) / (8)) is won and 15 (5) (15 (6) / (15) on the winning line L of the left reel or the right reel. 7) / (8)) In the state where the “bell” constituting the stop is stopped, when the stop operation of the middle reel is performed, the timing at which the stop operation of the middle reel is performed is the drawing range of “black 7”. On the condition that 15 sheets (5) (15 sheets (6) / (7) / (8)) have won and the timing of stopping the middle reel is “black 7” (“net 7”) / "White 7" / "BAR"), no winning combination will be won (except when special roles are carried over).

  If the small role GR (9) (the small role GR (10) / (11) / (12)) is elected and the right reel is the first stop, 15 pieces (C) are formed on the winning line L. When the “bell” to be stopped can be stopped, the control for stopping the “bell” on the winning line L is performed. As shown in FIG. 3, since the “bells” are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the right reel, the small role GR (9) (small role GR (10) / (11) / (12)) is won. However, when the right reel is set to the first stop, the “bell” constituting 15 sheets (C) is surely stopped.

Next, the small role GR (9) (the small role GR (10) / (11) / (12)) is won and the “bell” constituting 15 cards (C) on the winning line L of the right reel is stopped. In the state where the left and middle reels are stopped, the “replay” that constitutes 15 cards (C) on the winning line L with a drawing range of up to 4 frames is controlled. As shown in FIG. 3, “replay” is arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the left and middle reels, so that the small role GR (9) (small role GR (10) / (11) / (12)) Is selected, and when the left and middle reels are stopped while the “bell” constituting 15 (C) is stopped on the winning line L of the right reel, 15 (C) is selected. The “replay” to be configured always stops on the left, middle reel winning line L. That is, when the small role GR (9) (the small role GR (10) / (11) / (12)) is won and the right reel is set to the first stop, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated. Regardless of the timing, 15 (C) will always win.

  On the other hand, when the small combination GR (9) (small combination GR (10) / (11) / (12)) is won and the left reel or the middle reel is set to the first stop, a maximum of 4 on the winning line L Control is performed to stop “bells” constituting 15 sheets (9) (15 sheets (10) / (11) / (12)) within the frame drawing range. Since the “bells” are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the left and middle reels, the small role GR (9) (small role GR (10) / (11) / (12)) is elected and the left reel or When the middle reel is in the first stop, the “bell” constituting 15 (9) (15 (10) / (11) / (12)) on the left reel or middle reel winning line L is always It will stop. Further, in this embodiment, the winning line from which the winning is determined is only the winning line L, and when one of the reels stops, one symbol that can be stopped on the winning line L in the reel is one. If the small role GR (9) (the small role GR (10) / (11) / (12)) is won and the left reel or the middle reel is set to the first stop, the left reel or the middle reel The “replay” that configures 15 (C) on the winning line L does not stop.

Next, the small role GR (9) (the small role GR (10) / (11) / (12)) is won and 15 (9) (15 (10) / When the “bell” constituting (11) / (12)) is stopped and the right reel is stopped, 15 cards (9 ) “Black 7” (15 sheets (10) “net 7” / 15 sheets (11) “white 7” / 15 sheets (12) “BAR”)) If it is possible, “Black 7” (“Net 7” / “White 7” / “BAR”) is stopped on the winning line L, and “Black 7” is drawn on the winning line L with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. ”(“ Net 7 ”/“ white 7 ”/“ BAR ”) cannot be stopped, neither of the winning combinations is aligned with the winning line L Performs control to stop the pattern. Since “black 7” (“net 7” / “white 7” / “BAR”) is arranged with an interval of 5 frames or more on the right reel, the small role GR (9) (small role GR (10) / (11) / (12)) is elected, and the “bell” constituting 15 (9) (15 (10) / (11) / (12)) on the winning line L of the left reel or the middle reel When the right reel is stopped in the stopped state, “black 7” (15 pieces (10) “net 7” / 15 pieces (11) constituting 15 pieces (9)) "Black 7" (15 sheets (10)) comprising 15 sheets (9) only when the stop operation is performed within the pull-in range of "White 7" comprising 15 sheets ("BAR" constituting 15 sheets (12)) “NET 7” / 15 sheets (11), “WHITE 7” / 15 sheets (12), “BAR”) is the right reel winning line So that the stop to L. In other words, the small role GR (9) (the small role GR (10) / (11) / (12)) is won and 15 (9) (15 (10) / (15) on the winning line L of the left reel or the middle reel. 11) / (12)) In the state where the “bell” constituting the stop is stopped, when the right reel is stopped, the timing at which the right reel is stopped is “black 7”. On the condition that 15 sheets (9) (15 sheets (10) / (11) / (12)) won, and the timing of the right reel stop operation was “Black 7” (“Net 7”) / "White 7" / "BAR"), no winning combination will be won (except when special roles are carried over).

  In this way, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16, when the small roles GR (1) to (4) are won, the left reel is set to the first stop, so that 15 sheets (A) must be obtained. If a reel other than the left reel is set to the first stop, “Black 7” is awarded when the small role GR (1) is won, and “Net 7” is awarded when the small role GR (2) is won. When winning the small role GR (3), “White 7” is selected. When winning the small role GR (4), “Left” is stopped by operating the left reel at the timing of “BAR”. (1) to (4) can be won, but if the left reel is stopped at other timings, none of the small roles will win.

  In addition, when the small roles GR (5) to (8) are elected, it is possible to always win 15 sheets (B) by setting the middle reel to the first stop, and reels other than the middle reel. Is the first stop, “Black 7” when winning the small role GR (5), “Net 7” when winning the small role GR (6), “White 7” when winning the small role GR (7) "When winning the small role GR (8), the 15 reels (5) to (8) can be won by stopping the middle reel at the timing of the" BAR "pull-in range. However, if the middle reel is stopped at other timings, none of the small roles will be won.

  Further, when the small roles GR (9) to (12) are won, it is possible to always win 15 cards (C) by making the right reel the first stop, and reels other than the right reel Is the first stop, “Black 7” when winning the small role GR (9), “Net 7” when winning the small role GR (10), “White 7” when winning the small role GR (11) "When winning the small role GR (12), the winning 15 cards (9) to (12) can be won by performing the right reel stop operation at the timing of the" BAR "pull-in range. However, if the right reel is stopped at other timings, none of the small roles will win.

  That is, depending on whether the small role GR (1) to (4) has been won, the small role GR (5) to (8) has been won, or the small role GR (9) to (12) has been won. The first stop reel that the winning combination will always win is different.

Further, when the small roles GR (1) to (4) are elected and the left reel is the first stop, the small roles GR (5) to (8) are elected and the middle reel is the first stop, When the small roles GR (9) to (12) are elected and the right reel is set to the first stop, 15 sheets (A) to (C) are won at a rate of 100%, and the payout in this case Expected value is 15 sheets. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 3, “black 7”, “net 7”, “white 7”, and “BAR” are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or more on all reels, and are intentionally stopped on the winning line L. Because it is not possible, if the small role GR (1) to (4) is elected and the reels other than the left reel are first stopped, the small role GR (5) to (8) is elected and other than the middle reel When the reels are in the first stop, the small roles GR (9) to (12) are elected, and when the reels other than the right reel are in the first stop, 5/21 or 6/21 (“black”, respectively). 15 (1) to (12) wins at a ratio of “7”, “Net 7”, “White 7” and “BAR” that can be pulled in / the total number of stop operation positions), so the expected payout value in this case ((15 × 5/21 × 3 + 15 × 6/21) / 4) is about 3.75 sheets.

  Therefore, when the small roles GR (1) to (4) are won, the left reel is set to the first stop, and when the small roles GR (5) to (8) are won, the middle reel If the small roles GR (9) to (12) are elected when the first stop is selected, the right reel is set to the first stop and the other reels are set to the first stop, respectively. The payout expectation value is high, and more medals can be obtained. That is, depending on whether the small role GR (1) to (4) has been won, the small role GR (5) to (8) has been won, or the small role GR (9) to (12) has been won The first stop reel with a high expected value is also different.

  Even if any of the small roles GR (1) to (12) is won, if the type is not known, the first stop reel to which the small role always wins cannot be selected. The first stop reel that the winning combination always wins at the rate of 3 is selected, and the first stopping reel with the low expected payout value is selected at the rate of 2/3, so that the small roles GR (1) to (12) The payout expectation value (15/3 + 3.75 × 2/3) when any one wins is about 7.5.

  On the other hand, when any of the small roles GR (1) to (12) wins, the sub CPU 91a wins the first stop reel (the small roles GR (1) to (4)) that the small role always wins. Stop order to notify the left reel if time, medium reel if small role GR (5)-(8) is won, right reel if small role GR (9)-(12) is won The notification can be executed, and the stop order notification is executed, so that the player can specify the first stop reel that the small role always wins, and the notified reel is designated as the first stop. It is possible to win any one of 15 (A) to (C), so that more medals can be obtained than when stop order notification is not executed.

  The stop order notification is not limited as long as the player can recognize the first stop reel, and the first stop reel or an image indicating the stop order is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Alternatively, notification may be made by lighting a corresponding LED, outputting a corresponding sound, or the like.

  In the present embodiment, when the combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay” stops on the winning line L, the replay (1) that is awarded, and when the combination of “Black 7-Replay-Replay” stops on the winning line L. The combination of replay (2) and winning combination when "net 7-replay-replay" stops on winning line L. The combination of replay (3) and "white 7-replay-replay" on winning line L. Replay (4) that will be awarded when stopped and Replay (5) that will be awarded when the combination of “BAR-Replay-Replay” stops on the winning line L is won simultaneously (Replay GR (1)). Replay (1), “Replay-Black 7-Replay”, which is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay” stops on the winning line L Replay (6) that wins when the combination stops on the winning line L, Replay (7) that wins when the combination of “Replay-Net 7-Replay” stops on the winning line L, “Replay-White 7” -Replay (8) that wins when the "Replay" combination stops on the winning line L and Replay (9) that wins when the "Replay-BAR-Replay" combination stops on the winning line L (Replay GR (2)), and the combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay” is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay” stops on the winning line L, and the combination of “Replay-Replay-Black 7” becomes the winning line L Replay (10) that wins when stopped, “Replay-Replay-Net 7” combination wins when winning combination L The replay (11) and the combination of “Replay-Replay-White 7” stopped on the winning line L when the combination of Replay (12) and “Replay-Replay-BAR” stopped on the winning line L Sometimes the replay (13) that wins is won simultaneously (replay GR (3)).

  When replay GR (1) is elected and the left reel is in the first stop, the replay (1) is constituted by a drawing range of up to four frames on the winning line L, and the replay (2) is constituted. “Black 7”, “Net 7” constituting Replay (3), “White 7” constituting Replay (4), and “BAR” constituting Replay (5) “Black 7” “Net 7” "White 7" or "BAR" is stopped. As shown in FIG. 3, since “Black 7”, “Net 7”, “White 7”, and “BAR” are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the left reel, the replay GR (1) is selected and the left reel is In the case of the first stop, “black 7” constituting the replay (2) on the winning line L of the left reel, “net 7” constituting the replay (3), “white 7” constituting the replay (4). ", Any one of the" BARs "constituting the replay (5) is surely stopped.

  Next, the replay GR (1) wins, and the winning line L of the left reel is “black 7” constituting the replay (2), “net 7” constituting the replay (3), and “replay (4) constituting“ In the state where either “White 7” or “BAR” constituting Replay (5) is stopped, when the middle and right reels are stopped, a drawing range of up to four frames on the winning line L The control for stopping the “replay” constituting the replays (2) to (5) is performed. As shown in FIG. 3, since the “replay” is arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the right reel, the replay GR (1) is won and the replay (2) is configured on the winning line L of the left reel. "Black 7", Replay (3) "Net 7", Replay (4) "White 7", Replay (5) "BAR" In the middle and right reel stop operations, the “replay” that constitutes the replays (2) to (5) is surely stopped at the right reel winning line L. That is, when the replay GR (1) is won and the left reel is set to the first stop, any one of the replays (2) to (5) is performed regardless of the timing when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. Make sure to win a prize.

  On the other hand, when the replay GR (1) is elected and the middle reel or the right reel is set to the first stop, the replays (1) to (5) are configured on the winning line L with a drawing range of up to four frames. Control to stop "Replay". Since “Replay” is arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the middle and right reels, when the replay GR (1) is selected and the middle or right reel is set to the first stop, the middle or right reel “Replay” constituting the replays (1) to (5) in the winning line L of the game will always stop.

  Next, when the replay GR (1) is won and the “replay” constituting the replays (1) to (5) is stopped on the winning line L of the middle reel or the right reel, the left reel is stopped. In the case of the game, the “replay” that constitutes the replay (1) is stopped on the winning line L within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. As shown in FIG. 3, since “replay” is arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the left reel, the replay GR (1) is won and the replay (1) to the winning line L of the middle reel or the right reel is selected. When the “replay” constituting (5) is stopped and the left reel is stopped, the “replay” constituting replay (1) always stops on the winning line L of the left reel. It will be. That is, when the replay GR (1) is won and the reels other than the left reel are first stopped, the replay (1) always wins regardless of the timing when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated. It has become.

  When replay GR (2) is elected and the middle reel is set to the first stop, “replay” and replay (6) that constitute replay (1) with a draw range of up to 4 frames on winning line L are configured. Of “Black 7”, “Net 7” constituting replay (7), “White 7” constituting replay (8), and “BAR” constituting replay (9) “Black 7” “Net 7” "White 7" or "BAR" is stopped. As shown in FIG. 3, since “black 7”, “net 7”, “white 7”, and “BAR” are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the middle reel, the replay GR (2) is selected and the middle reel is In the case of the first stop, “black 7” constituting the replay (6) on the winning line L of the middle reel, “net 7” constituting the replay (7), “white 7” constituting the replay (8). ", Any one of the" BARs "that make up the replay (9) will always stop.

  Next, the replay GR (2) is elected, “black 7” constituting the replay (6) on the winning line L of the middle reel, “net 7” constituting the replay (7), “replay (8) constituting“ If any of the left and right reels is stopped while either “White 7” or “BAR” constituting the replay (9) is stopped, a drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line L The control for stopping the “replay” constituting the replays (6) to (9) is performed. As shown in FIG. 3, since “Replay” is arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the left and right reels, the replay GR (2) is won and the replay (6) is configured on the winning line L of the middle reel. "Black 7", "Net 7" composing replay (7), "White 7" composing replay (8), and "BAR" composing replay (9) are stopped. When the stop operation of the left and right reels is performed, the “replay” constituting the replays (6) to (9) always stops on the winning line L of the left and right reels. That is, when the replay GR (2) is won and the middle reel is set to the first stop, any one of the replays (6) to (9) is performed regardless of the timing when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. Make sure to win a prize.

  On the other hand, when the replay GR (2) is elected and the left reel or the right reel is set to the first stop, the replays (1), (6) to (9) are performed on the winning line L with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. Control to stop “replay” to be configured is performed. Since “Replay” is arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the left and right reels, if the replay GR (2) is selected and the left reel or the right reel is set to the first stop, the left reel or the right reel The “replay” that constitutes the replays (1), (6) to (9) is always stopped on the pay line L.

  Next, when the replay GR (2) is won and the “replay” constituting the replays (1), (6) to (9) is stopped on the winning line L of the left reel or the right reel, the middle reel is stopped. When an operation is performed, control is performed to stop “replay” that constitutes the replay (1) on the winning line L with a drawing range of up to four frames. As shown in FIG. 3, since “replay” is arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the middle reel, the replay GR (2) is won and the replay (1) ( When the middle reel is stopped in a state where the “replay” constituting 6) to (9) is stopped, the “replay” constituting the replay (1) is always the middle reel winning line L. Will stop. That is, when the replay GR (2) is won and the reels other than the middle reel are set to the first stop, the replay (1) always wins regardless of the timing when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. It has become.

  When replay GR (3) is elected and the right reel is set to the first stop, “replay” and replay (10) that constitute replay (1) with a draw range of up to 4 frames on winning line L “Black 7”, “Net 7” composing the replay (11), “White 7” composing the replay (12), and “BAR” composing the replay (13) “Black 7” “Net 7” "White 7" or "BAR" is stopped. As shown in FIG. 3, since “Black 7”, “Net 7”, “White 7”, and “BAR” are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the right reel, Replay GR (3) wins and the right reel is In the case of the first stop, “black 7” constituting the replay (10) on the winning line L of the right reel, “net 7” constituting the replay (11), “white 7” constituting the replay (12). ", Any one of the" BARs "constituting the replay (13) will always stop.

  Next, the replay GR (3) wins, and the winning line L of the right reel is “black 7” constituting the replay (10), “net 7” constituting the replay (11), and “replay (12) constituting“ If any of the left and middle reels are stopped while either “White 7” or “BAR” constituting Replay (13) is stopped, a drawing range of up to four frames on the winning line L The control for stopping the “replay” constituting the replays (10) to (13) is performed. As shown in FIG. 3, since “Replay” is arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the left and middle reels, the replay GR (3) is won and the replay (10) is configured on the winning line L of the right reel. "Black 7", "Net 7" composing the replay (11), "White 7" composing the replay (12), and "BAR" composing the replay (13) are stopped. When the stop operation of the left and middle reels is performed, the “replay” constituting the replays (10) to (13) always stops at the winning line L of the left and middle reels. That is, when the replay GR (3) is won and the right reel is set to the first stop, any one of the replays (10) to (13) is performed regardless of the timing when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated. Make sure to win a prize.

  On the other hand, when the replay GR (3) is elected and the left reel or the middle reel is set to the first stop, the replays (1), (10) to (13) are performed on the winning line L with a drawing range of up to four frames. Control to stop “replay” to be configured is performed. Since “Replay” is arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the left and middle reels, if the replay GR (3) is elected and the left reel or middle reel is set to the first stop, the left reel or middle reel “Replay” that constitutes replays (1), (10) to (13) in the pay line L will always stop.

  Next, when the replay GR (3) is won and the “replay” constituting the replays (1), (10) to (13) is stopped on the winning line L of the left reel or the middle reel, the right reel is stopped. When an operation is performed, control is performed to stop “Replay” that constitutes Replay (1) on the winning line L with a drawing range of up to four frames. As shown in FIG. 3, since “replay” is arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the right reel, the replay GR (3) is won and replay (1) ( When the right reel is stopped while the “replay” constituting 10) to (13) is stopped, the “replay” constituting the replay (1) is always the middle reel winning line L. Will stop. That is, when the replay GR (3) is won and the reels other than the right reel are first stopped, the replay (1) always wins regardless of the timing when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated. It has become.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the replay GR (1) is won, the left reel is set to the first stop, so that the replays (2) to (5) always win and reels other than the left reel are selected. In the case of the first stop, replay (1) is always won.

  Also, when the replay GR (2) is won, the replays (6) to (9) always win by setting the middle reel to the first stop, and the reels other than the middle reel are set to the first stop. Replay (1) will always win.

  In addition, when the replay GR (3) is won, the replay (10) to (13) always wins by setting the right reel as the first stop, and the reels other than the left reel are set as the first stop. Replay (1) will always win.

  That is, the replays (2) to (13) are awarded according to whether the replay GR (1) has been won, the replay GR (2) has been won, or the replay GR (3) has been won. 1 stop reel is different.

  If any one of the replays GR (1) to (3) is won, any one of the replays (1) to (13) will win regardless of which reel is selected as the first stop reel. There is no difference in the expected payout value if only the game is viewed. However, as will be described later, in this embodiment, when replay (1) is won in RT (1), the number of remaining games in RT (1) is two or more games. Even so, when the replay GR (1) to (3) is won, it will be RT (2) which will be ended in two games and RT (1) will be effectively ended. In addition, it is possible to avoid the end of RT (1) by winning replays (2) to (13) instead of replay (1).

  However, when any one of the replays GR (1) to (3) is won, if the type is not known, the first stop reel for which the replays (2) to (13) will win is selected. The first stop reel is selected that will result in replays (2) to (13) winning at a rate of 1/3, but replay (1) will win at a rate of 2/3. Thus, the first stop reel is selected, and RT (1) ends.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 91a, when any one of the replays GR (1) to (3) wins, the first stop reel (replay GR (1)) that the replays (2) to (13) will win. It is possible to execute a stop order notification informing the left reel at the time of winning, the middle reel at the time of winning the replay GR (2), and the right reel at the time of winning the replay GR (3). Yes, the stop order notification is executed, so that the player can specify the first stop reel that the replays (2) to (13) will win, and the notified reel is set as the first stop. By doing so, it becomes possible to win the replays (2) to (13) instead of the replay (1), so that the end of RT (1) can be avoided.

  In this embodiment, when the replay (1) wins at RT (1), the RT (1) ends. However, at RT (1), the replays (2) to (13) are performed. The configuration may be such that the RT (1) ends when winning, and in this case, when any of the replays GR (1) to (3) wins, the replay (1) will win. 1 stop reel (when replay GR (1) is won, middle, right reel, when replay GR (2) is won, left, right reel, when replay GR (3) is won, left, middle By executing the stop order notification for notifying the reel), the player can specify the first stop reel that the replay (1) will win, and the notified reel is set to the first stop. Replay (2) to (13) It becomes possible to win the Rei (1), it is possible to avoid the end of the RT (1).

  Conventionally, when a specific winning combination is won by internal lottery, a stop order lottery is selected to select a stop order as a winning condition from a plurality of different reel stop orders, and matches the stop order won in this stop order lottery On the condition that each reel is stopped in the stop order, the specific winning combination in the internal lottery can be awarded, and the stop operation of each reel is different from the stop order selected in the stop order lottery. If a specific role is won in the internal lottery, the specific role cannot be won, and when a specific role is won, the stop order won in the stop order lottery There has been proposed a slot machine in which the player's advantage varies depending on whether or not the notification is made.

  However, in the conventional slot machine, in order to determine the stop order as the winning condition from the stop order of a plurality of different reels, it is necessary to perform the stop order lottery separately from the internal lottery, and the stop order as the winning condition is determined. For this reason, there is a problem that the control becomes complicated. In addition, since the winning conditions are determined by the stop order lottery that determines only the winning conditions different from the internal lottery that determines whether or not the winning is originally allowed, there is a range of random numbers for which the specific winning conditions are selected. Because it becomes easier to identify the timing when a specific winning condition is selected by stop order lottery from the cycle of random numbers, and the possibility of fraudulent acts using this increases, it may harm the fairness of the game was there.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the small roles GR (1) to (4) are won, the small roles GR (5) to (8) are won, or the small roles GR (9) to (12) are selected. Depending on whether or not the first stop reel to which the small role is to be awarded differs depending on whether or not the winning combination is selected, and if any of the small roles GR (1) to (12) is won, the small role is intentionally not understood. The fact that the first stop reel to be awarded cannot always be selected makes it possible to change the winning probability and the expected payout value of the small role depending on whether or not the reel to be stopped first is notified by the stop order notification. It can be held.

  Also, in this embodiment, if any of the small roles GR (1) to (12) is won and the reel that the small role always wins is set to the first stop, the 15 cards that are simultaneously won Of (1) to (12) or 15 (A) to (C), 15 (A) to (C) win and 15 (1) to (12) never win. In other words, if the reel that the small role always wins is set to the first stop, the type of the small role to be won does not change due to the technical intervention of the player.

  For example, in the case where the payout number of the small combination to be won at the same time in the small combinations GR (1) to (12) is different, or when the transition to a gaming state (such as RT) advantageous to the player is triggered by the winning of one small combination Even if the value given to the winning combination is different at the same time, as long as the simple technical intervention of selecting the first stop reel is performed, further technical intervention (for example, a specific design is selected) Since the value obtained by the stop operation at the target timing (so-called “push”) does not change, fairness can be maintained even among players having different skill levels.

  In the present embodiment, if any of the small roles GR (1) to (12) is won, and the reel that the small role always wins is set to the first stop, the 15 pieces that are simultaneously won Of the (1) to (12) or 15 (A) to (C), 15 (A) to (C) won and 15 (1) to (12) won't win. However, if any of the small roles GR (1) to (12) is elected and the reel that the small role always wins is set to the first stop, the 15 cards (1) to (12) that are simultaneously elected ) Or 15 sheets (A) to (C) may be awarded.

Specifically, when the small role GR (1) (the small role GR (2) / (3) / (4)) is won and the left reel is set to the first stop, a maximum of 4 on the pay line L “Black 7” composing 15 (1) in the drawing range of the frame (“Net 7” composing 15 (2) / “White 7” composing 15 (3) / 15 (4) "Black 7"("Net7" / "White 7" / "BAR") among the "Bells" constituting the "BAR") and 15 sheets (A) can be stopped. “Black 7” (“Net 7” / “White 7” / “BAR”) is stopped on the line L, and “Black 7” (“Net 7” / “ If white 7 "/" BAR ") cannot be stopped, control to stop" bell "is performed. As shown in FIG. 3, “black 7” (“net 7” / “white 7” / “BAR”) is arranged with an interval of 5 frames or more on the left reel, and cannot be stopped. However, since the “bells” are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the left reel, the small role GR (1) (small role GR (2) / (3) / (4)) is elected, When the left reel is in the first stop, “black 7” (15 pieces (2) “net 7” / 15 pieces (3) constituting 15 (1) on the winning line L of the left reel “White 7” / 15 (4) “BAR”) or 15 (A) “Bell” always stops.

  Next, the small role GR (1) (the small role GR (2) / (3) / (4)) is elected, and “Black 7” (15 cards) constituting 15 (1) on the winning line L of the left reel. (2) “mesh 7” / 15 sheets (3) “white 7” / 15 sheets (4) “BAR”) are stopped, and the middle and right reels are stopped When an operation is performed, a control for stopping “bells” constituting 15 sheets (1) (15 sheets (2) / (3) / (4)) in a drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line L I do. In addition, the small role GR (1) (the small role GR (2) / (3) / (4)) is won and the “bell” constituting 15 (A) on the winning line L of the left reel is stopped. When the middle and right reels are stopped while the player is in a state of being in play, control is performed to stop the “replay” that constitutes 15 cards (A) on the winning line L with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. As shown in FIG. 3, since the “bell” and “replay” are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the middle right reel, the small role GR (1) (small role GR (2) / (3) / (4)) is elected, “Black 7” constituting 15 (1) on the winning line L of the left reel, “Net 7” constituting 15 (2) / 15 (3) constituting “White” 7 ”/ 15 sheets (“ BAR ”constituting (4)) is stopped, and if the middle and right reels are stopped, 15 sheets (1) (15 sheets (2) / ( 3) / (4)) is always in the middle and stops at the winning line L of the right reel, and the small role GR (1) (small role GR (2) / (3) / (4)) In the state where the “bell” constituting 15 sheets (A) is stopped on the winning line L of the left reel and the middle and right reels are stopped, 15 sheets (A It is in always "replay" that make up the, and thus to stop the winning line L of the right reel. That is, when the small role GR (1) (small role GR (2) / (3) / (4)) is won and the left reel is set to the first stop, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated. Regardless of the timing, one of 15 (1) (15 (2) / (3) / (4)) or 15 (A) will always win.

  On the other hand, when the small combination GR (1) (small combination GR (2) / (3) / (4)) is won and the middle reel or the right reel is set to the first stop, a maximum of four on the winning line L Control is performed to stop “bells” constituting 15 sheets (1) (15 sheets (2) / (3) / (4)) within the frame drawing range. Since the “bell” is arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the middle and right reels, the small role GR (1) (small role GR (2) / (3) / (4)) is elected and the middle reel or When the right reel is in the first stop, the “bell” that makes up 15 (1) (15 (2) / (3) / (4)) on the winning line L of the middle reel or the right reel is always Will stop. In addition, the winning line from which the winning is determined is only the winning line L. When one of the reels stops, there is one symbol that can be stopped on the winning line L in the reel, If GR (1) (small role GR (2) / (3) / (4)) is elected and the middle reel or right reel is set to the first stop, the winning line L of the middle reel or right reel is set to 15 The “replay” constituting the sheet (A) does not stop.

Next, the small role GR (1) (the small role GR (2) / (3) / (4)) is won, and the winning line L of the middle reel or the right reel is 15 (1) (15 (2) / (3) / (4)) When the “bell” is stopped, if the left reel is stopped, 15 cards (1 in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line L) ) “Black 7” (15 sheets (2) “net 7” / 15 sheets (3) “white 7” / 15 sheets (4) “BAR”)) If it is possible, “Black 7” (“Net 7” / “White 7” / “BAR”) is stopped on the winning line L, and “Black 7” is drawn on the winning line L with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. ”(“ Net 7 ”/“ white 7 ”/“ BAR ”) cannot be stopped, the symbol that does not match any winning line L will be stopped. It is carried out. Since “black 7” (“net 7” / “white 7” / “BAR”) is arranged with an interval of 5 frames or more on the left reel, the small role GR (1) (small role GR (2) / (3) / (4)) is elected, and the “bell” constituting 15 (1) (15 (2) / (3) / (4)) on the winning line L of the middle reel or the right reel When the left reel is stopped in the stopped state, “black 7” (15 pieces (2) “net 7” / 15 pieces (3) constituting 15 pieces (1) “Black 7” (15 sheets (2)) constituting 15 sheets (1) only when a stop operation is performed within the pull-in range of “White 7” constituting 15 sheets (“BAR” constituting 15 sheets (4)) The “net 7” constituting 15 and “white 7” constituting 15 (3) / “BAR” constituting 15 (4)) are stopped on the winning line L of the left reel. In other words, the small role GR (1) (the small role GR (2) / (3) / (4)) is won and 15 (1) (15 (2) / (15) are placed on the winning line L of the middle reel or the right reel. 3) / (4)) In the state where the “bell” constituting the stop is stopped, when the left reel is stopped, the timing at which the left reel is stopped is “black 7”. On the condition that 15 sheets (1) (15 sheets (2) / (3) / (4)) won, the timing when the left reel was stopped was “Black 7” (“Net 7”). / "White 7" / "BAR"), no winning combination will be won (except when special roles are carried over).

If a small role GR (5) (small role GR (6) / (7) / (8)) is elected and the middle reel is set to the first stop, the winning line L can be drawn up to a maximum of 4 frames. "Black 7" composing 15 sheets (5) ("Net 7" composing 15 sheets (6) / "White 7" composing 15 sheets (7) / "BAR" composing 15 sheets (8) ) And “Black 7” (“Net 7” / “White 7” / “BAR”) among the “bells” constituting 15 sheets (B) can be stopped on the winning line L. Black 7 "(" Net 7 "/" White 7 "/" BAR ") is stopped, and" Black 7 "(" Net 7 "/" White 7 "/" If BAR ") cannot be stopped, control to stop" Bell "is performed. As shown in FIG. 3, “black 7” (“net 7” / “white 7” / “BAR”) is arranged at an interval of 5 frames or more in the middle reel and cannot be stopped. However, since the “bells” are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the middle reel, the small role GR (5) (small role GR (6) / (7) / (8)) is elected, When the middle reel is set to the first stop, “black 7” (15 pieces (6) “net 7” / 15 pieces (7) constituting 15 pieces (5) on the winning line L of the middle reel “White 7” / 15 (8) “BAR”) or 15 (B) “Bell” always stops.

  Next, the small role GR (5) (the small role GR (6) / (7) / (8)) is elected, and “Black 7” (15 sheets) constituting 15 (5) on the winning line L of the middle reel. (6) comprising “net 7” / 15 sheets (7) “white 7” / 15 sheets (8) “BAR”) is stopped, and the left and right reels are stopped. When an operation is performed, a control for stopping the “bell” that constitutes 15 (5) (15 (6) / (7) / (8)) in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line L I do. In addition, the small role GR (5) (the small role GR (6) / (7) / (8)) is won and the “bell” constituting 15 (B) on the winning line L of the middle reel is stopped. In the state where the left and right reels are stopped in a state in which the player is in the game, control is performed to stop the “replay” that configures 15 cards (B) on the winning line L with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. As shown in FIG. 3, “bell” and “replay” are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the left and right reels, so that the small role GR (5) (small role GR (6) / (7) / (8)) is elected, and “Black 7” (15 pieces (6) constituting “Net 7” / 15 pieces (7) constituting “15 pieces (5)” on the winning line L of the middle reel “ If the left and right reels are stopped while the white 7 ”/ 15 (8)“ BAR ”) is stopped, 15 (5) (15 (6) / The “bell” constituting (7) / (8)) always stops at the winning line L of the left and right reels, and the small role GR (5) (small role GR (6) / (7) / (8)) Is selected, and when the left and right reels are stopped while the “bell” constituting 15 (B) is stopped on the middle reel winning line L, 15 ( ) Always is "Replay" that make up the left, and thus to stop the winning line L of the right reel. That is, when the small role GR (5) (small role GR (6) / (7) / (8)) is won and the middle reel is set to the first stop, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated. Regardless of the timing, one of 15 (5) (15 (6) / (7) / (8)) or 15 (B) always wins.

  On the other hand, when the small role GR (5) (small role GR (6) / (7) / (8)) is won and the left reel or the right reel is set to the first stop, a maximum of 4 on the winning line L Control is performed to stop the “bells” constituting 15 sheets (5) (15 sheets (6) / (7) / (8)) within the frame drawing range. Since the “bells” are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the left and right reels, the small role GR (5) (small role GR (6) / (7) / (8)) is elected and the left reel or When the right reel is in the first stop, the “bell” that makes up 15 (5) (15 (6) / (7) / (8)) on the winning line L of the left reel or the right reel is always Will stop. In addition, the winning line from which the winning is determined is only the winning line L. When one of the reels stops, there is one symbol that can be stopped on the winning line L in the reel, When GR (5) (small role GR (6) / (7) / (8)) is elected and the left reel or right reel is set to the first stop, 15 is placed on the winning line L of the left reel or right reel. The “replay” constituting the sheet (B) does not stop.

Next, the small role GR (5) (the small role GR (6) / (7) / (8)) is won, and 15 (5) (15 (6) / (7) / (8)) in the state where the “bell” is stopped, if a middle reel is stopped, 15 cards (5 on the winning line L) with a drawing range of up to 4 frames ) “Black 7” (15 sheets (6) “net 7” / 15 sheets (7) “white 7” / 15 sheets (8) “BAR”)) If it is possible, “Black 7” (“Net 7” / “White 7” / “BAR”) is stopped on the winning line L, and “Black 7” is drawn on the winning line L with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. ”(“ Net 7 ”/“ white 7 ”/“ BAR ”) cannot be stopped, the symbol that does not match any winning line L will be stopped. It is carried out. Since “black 7” (“net 7” / “white 7” / “BAR”) is arranged with an interval of 5 frames or more in the middle reel, the small role GR (5) (small role GR (6) / (7) / (8)) is elected, and the “bell” constituting 15 (5) (15 (6) / (7) / (8)) on the winning line L of the left reel or the right reel When the middle reel is stopped in the stopped state, “black 7” (15 pieces (6) “net 7” / 15 pieces (7) constituting 15 pieces (5)) "Black 7" (15 sheets (6)) constituting 15 sheets (5) only when a stop operation is performed within the pull-in range of "White 7" comprising 15 sheets ("BAR" constituting 15 sheets (8)) The “net 7” / 15 sheets (7) “white 7” / 15 sheets (8) “BAR”) are stopped on the winning line L of the middle reel. In other words, the small role GR (5) (the small role GR (6) / (7) / (8)) is won and 15 (5) (15 (6) / (15) on the winning line L of the left reel or the right reel. 7) / (8)) In the state where the “bell” constituting the stop is stopped, when the stop operation of the middle reel is performed, the timing at which the stop operation of the middle reel is performed is the drawing range of “black 7”. On the condition that 15 sheets (5) (15 sheets (6) / (7) / (8)) have won and the timing of stopping the middle reel is “black 7” (“net 7”) / "White 7" / "BAR"), no winning combination will be won (except when special roles are carried over).

If the small role GR (9) (small role GR (10) / (11) / (12)) is elected and the right reel is set to the first stop, the winning line L can be drawn up to a maximum of 4 frames. “Black 7” composing 15 sheets (9) (“Net 7” composing 15 sheets (10) / “White 7” composing 15 sheets (11) / “BAR” composing 15 sheets (12) ) And “black 7” (“net 7” / “white 7” / “BAR”) among the “bells” constituting 15 sheets (C) can be stopped on the winning line L Black 7 "(" Net 7 "/" White 7 "/" BAR ") is stopped, and" Black 7 "(" Net 7 "/" White 7 "/" If BAR ") cannot be stopped, control to stop" Bell "is performed. As shown in FIG. 3, “black 7” (“net 7” / “white 7” / “BAR”) is arranged at intervals of 5 frames or more on the right reel, and cannot be stopped. However, since the “bells” are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the right reel, the small role GR (9) (small role GR (10) / (11) / (12)) is won, When the right reel is in the first stop, “black 7” (15 pieces (10) “net 7” / 15 pieces (11) constituting 15 pieces (9) on the winning line L of the right reel) “White 7” / 15 sheets (“BAR” constituting 12) or “Bell” constituting 15 sheets (C) always stops.

  Next, the small role GR (9) (the small role GR (10) / (11) / (12)) is elected, and “Black 7” (15 cards) constituting 15 (9) on the winning line L of the right reel. (10) “net 7” / 15 sheets (11) “white 7” / 15 sheets (12) “BAR”) are stopped, and the left and middle reels are stopped. When an operation is performed, a control for stopping “bells” constituting 15 sheets (9) (15 sheets (10) / (11) / (12)) within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames on the winning line L I do. In addition, the small role GR (9) (the small role GR (10) / (11) / (12)) is won and the “bell” constituting 15 (C) on the winning line L of the right reel stops. In the state where the left and middle reels are stopped, the “replay” that constitutes 15 cards (C) on the winning line L with a drawing range of up to 4 frames is controlled. As shown in FIG. 3, since the “bell” and “replay” are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the left and middle reels, the small role GR (9) (small role GR (10) / (11) / (12)) is elected, and “Black 7” (15 “10” constituting “Net 7” / 15 (11) ”constituting“ 15 (9) ”on the winning line L of the right reel“ When the operation of stopping the left and middle reels is performed in a state where “BAR 7” constituting “White 7” / 15 sheets (12) is stopped, 15 sheets (9) (15 sheets (10) / The “bell” constituting (11) / (12)) always stops on the left, middle reel winning line L, and the small role GR (9) (small role GR (10) / (11) / (12)) Is selected and the left and middle reels cannot be stopped while the “bell” constituting 15 (C) is stopped on the winning line L of the right reel. If it is, it makes up 15 sheets of (C) "Replay" is always left, and thus to stop the winning line L of the middle reel. That is, when the small role GR (9) (the small role GR (10) / (11) / (12)) is won and the right reel is set to the first stop, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated. Regardless of the timing, one of 15 (9) (15 (10) / (11) / (12)) or 15 (C) always wins.

  On the other hand, when the small combination GR (9) (small combination GR (10) / (11) / (12)) is won and the left reel or the middle reel is set to the first stop, a maximum of 4 on the winning line L Control is performed to stop “bells” constituting 15 sheets (9) (15 sheets (10) / (11) / (12)) within the frame drawing range. Since the “bells” are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on the left and middle reels, the small role GR (9) (small role GR (10) / (11) / (12)) is elected and the left reel or When the middle reel is in the first stop, the “bell” constituting 15 (9) (15 (10) / (11) / (12)) on the left reel or middle reel winning line L is always It will stop. In addition, the winning line from which the winning is determined is only the winning line L. When one of the reels stops, there is one symbol that can be stopped on the winning line L in the reel, When GR (9) (small role GR (10) / (11) / (12)) is elected and the left reel or middle reel is set to the first stop, the winning line L of the left reel or middle reel is set to 15 The “replay” constituting the sheet (C) does not stop.

Next, the small role GR (9) (the small role GR (10) / (11) / (12)) is won and 15 (9) (15 (10) / When the “bell” constituting (11) / (12)) is stopped and the right reel is stopped, 15 cards (9 ) “Black 7” (15 sheets (10) “net 7” / 15 sheets (11) “white 7” / 15 sheets (12) “BAR”)) If it is possible, “Black 7” (“Net 7” / “White 7” / “BAR”) is stopped on the winning line L, and “Black 7” is drawn on the winning line L with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. ”(“ Net 7 ”/“ white 7 ”/“ BAR ”) cannot be stopped, neither of the winning combinations is aligned with the winning line L Performs control to stop the pattern. Since “black 7” (“net 7” / “white 7” / “BAR”) is arranged with an interval of 5 frames or more on the right reel, the small role GR (9) (small role GR (10) / (11) / (12)) is elected, and the “bell” constituting 15 (9) (15 (10) / (11) / (12)) on the winning line L of the left reel or the middle reel When the right reel is stopped in the stopped state, “black 7” (15 pieces (10) “net 7” / 15 pieces (11) constituting 15 pieces (9)) "Black 7" (15 sheets (10)) comprising 15 sheets (9) only when the stop operation is performed within the pull-in range of "White 7" comprising 15 sheets ("BAR" constituting 15 sheets (12)) “NET 7” / 15 sheets (11), “WHITE 7” / 15 sheets (12), “BAR”) is the right reel winning line So that the stop to L. In other words, the small role GR (9) (the small role GR (10) / (11) / (12)) is won and 15 (9) (15 (10) / (15) on the winning line L of the left reel or the middle reel. 11) / (12)) In the state where the “bell” constituting the stop is stopped, when the right reel is stopped, the timing at which the right reel is stopped is “black 7”. On the condition that 15 sheets (9) (15 sheets (10) / (11) / (12)) won, and the timing of the right reel stop operation was “Black 7” (“Net 7”) / "White 7" / "BAR"), no winning combination will be won (except when special roles are carried over).

  According to the above control, as shown in FIG. 17, when the small roles GR (1) to (4) are elected, the left reel is set to the first stop, so that 15 sheets (1) to (4) ) Or 15 (A) can always be won, and if the reels other than the left reel are in the first stop, “Black 7”, small when the small role GR (1) is won When winning the role GR (2), the left reel has a timing of “Net 7”, when winning the small role GR (3), “White 7”, when winning the small role GR (4), and “BAR”. It is possible to win 15 (1) to (4) that have been won by performing the stop operation, but if the stop operation of the left reel is performed at other timings, no small part will be won. .

  In addition, when the small roles GR (5) to (8) are elected, the middle reel is set to the first stop, so that either 15 (5) to (8) or 15 (B) If a reel other than the middle reel is set to the first stop, “Black 7” is awarded when the small role GR (5) is won, and “Net 7” is awarded when the small role GR (6) is won. When winning the small role GR (7), “White 7” is selected, and when winning the small role GR (8), “15” is selected by stopping the middle reel at the timing of the “BAR” pull-in range. (5) to (8) can be won, but if the middle reel is stopped at other timings, none of the small roles will win.

  In addition, when the small roles GR (9) to (12) are won, the right reel is set to the first stop, so that either of the 15 (9) to (12) or 15 (C) If a reel other than the right reel is set to the first stop, “Black 7” is awarded when the small role GR (9) is won, and “Net 7” is awarded when the small role GR (10) is won. When winning the small role GR (11), “White 7” and when winning the small role GR (12), “15” is selected by stopping the right reel at the timing of “BAR”. (9) to (12) can be won, but if the right reel is stopped at other timings, none of the small roles will win.

  In this way, when a small role GR (1) to (4) (small role GR (5) to (8) / small role GR (9) to (12)) is won, the small role always wins. When the left reel (middle reel / left reel) is in the first stop, “Black 7”, small role GR when winning the small role GR (1) (small role GR (5) / small role GR (9)) (2) At the time of winning (small role GR (6) / small role GR (10)) “net 7”, when winning small role GR (3) (small role GR (7) / small role GR (11)) When “White 7” and small role GR (4) (small role GR (8) / small role GR (12)) are selected, the left reel (middle reel / left reel) Depending on whether or not the stop operation is performed, 15 sheets (1) to (4) (15 sheets (5) to (8) / 15 sheets (9) to (12)) are awarded or 15 sheets (A) ( 15 sheets B) / 15 sheets (C)) or to a prize winning can be selected. In other words, in addition to the technical intervention to select the order of the reel stop operation, the technical intervention to select the timing of the stop operation (so-called “push”) makes it possible for different types of small roles to be awarded, thereby enhancing the interest. it can.

  Further, in this case, different values are given depending on whether 15 sheets (1) to (12) are won or 15 sheets (A) to (C) are won and will be described later according to the given values. 15 (1) to (12) have been awarded, such as giving a privilege such as increasing the probability of performing an AT lottery or performing a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value, or 15 (A) to It is preferable that the player's advantage changes depending on whether or not (C) is won, and in this way, 15 pieces ( By selecting whether to win 1) to (12) or 15 (A) to (C), the player's advantage changes even if the number of payouts due to winning a small role is the same. Therefore, the game can be expanded.

  In this embodiment, 15 (A) left reel configuration symbols, 15 (A) and 15 (1) to (4) winning symbols, right reel configuration symbols, 15 (B) ) Medium reel configuration symbols, 15 (B) winning at the same time 15 (5) to (8) left and right reel configuration symbols, 15 (C) right reel configuration symbols, 15 ( The left and middle reels of 15 sheets (9) to (12) that are selected at the same time as C) are all the same “bell”.

  In addition, as described above, when any of the small roles GR (1) to (12) has been won and the reel that the small role always wins is set as the first stop, 1) to (12) or 15 (A) to (C), 15 (A) to (C) won, 15 (1) to (12) never won, and small When a small role wins with a reel different from the reel that the winning combination always wins as the first stop, among the 15 (1) to (12) or 15 (A) to (C) winning simultaneously 15 sheets (1) to (12) win, and 15 sheets (A) to (C) do not win.

  For this reason, even if any of the small roles GR (1) to (12) wins and the reel that the small role always wins is selected as the first stop reel according to the combination of the winning roles, Even when a reel that is different from the winning reel is selected as the first stop reel, the “bell” always stops on the winning line L in the first stop reel, and when the first stop reel stops, the small amount is small. It is impossible to determine whether or not the stop operation has been performed in the procedure in which the winning combination always wins, and the expectation that the selection of the first stop reel is correct after the first stop is maintained. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the left reel configuration symbol of 15 (A), and the 15 reels (1) to (4) selected at the same time as 15 (A), the right reel configuration symbol, 15 (B ) Medium reel configuration symbols, 15 (B) winning at the same time 15 (5) to (8) left and right reel configuration symbols, 15 (C) right reel configuration symbols, 15 ( C) The 15 symbols (9) to (12) that are selected at the same time are composed of the same symbols on the left and middle reels. For example, each reel has a “watermelon” symbol within 4 frames. And a combination of 15 (1) to (4) (15 (5) to (8) / 15 (9) to (12)) symbols "Black 7 / Net 7 / White 7 / BAR-Replay-Replay "(" Replay-Black 7 / Net 7 / White 7 / BAR-Replay "/" Replay-Replay-Black 7 / Net / White 7 / BAR "), and the combination of 15 (A) (15 (B) / 15 (C)) symbols is" Watermelon Bell-Bell "(" Bell-Watermelon Bell "/" Bell -Bell-Watermelon "), etc., and 15 reel (A) left reel configuration symbols, and 15 reels (1) to (4) selected at the same time as 15 (A), right reel configuration symbols, 15 (B) medium reel configuration symbols, 15 (B) and 15 (5)-(8) left and right reel configuration symbols, 15 (C) right reel configuration The design and the left and middle reels of 15 (9) to (12) winning at the same time as the 15 (C) may be different. By adopting such a configuration, the small role GR ( 1)-(12) wins the reel that the small role always wins according to the combination of the winning combination The symbol that stops on the winning line L of the first stop reel is different from the case where the reel is selected as a first stop reel that is different from the reel that the small role must always win. For example, when the reel that the small role always wins is selected as the first stop reel, “watermelon” stops, and when the reel that is different from the reel that the small role always wins is selected as the first stop reel, “Replay” stops), so that when the first stop reel stops, it can be identified that the small role has been stopped in the procedure that the small role always wins, so there is a sense of security that the small role will always win. Can be given to players.

  In the present embodiment, in the small roles GR (1) to (4), any one of 15 sheets (1) to (4) and 15 sheets (A) are simultaneously elected, and the small roles GR (5) to ( In 8), any of 15 sheets (5) to (8) and 15 sheets (B) are won at the same time, and in small roles GR (9) to (12), 15 sheets (9) to (12) Any one and 15 sheets (C) are won at the same time, but in the small roles GR (1) to (4), 15 sheets (1) to (4) and 15 sheets (D) are won at the same time. In the roles GR (5) to (8), 15 (5) to (8) and 15 (D) are won simultaneously, and in the small roles GR (9) to (12), 15 (9) ~ (12) and 15 sheets (D) are elected at the same time, that is, 15 sheets (1) to (12) and 15 common sheets (D) in small roles GR (1) to (12) It may be configured to be elected at the same time.

  For example, a combination of 15 (1) to (4) symbols is “black 7 / net 7 / white 7 / BAR-replay-replay”, and a combination of 15 (5) to (8) symbols is “replay”. -Black 7 / Net 7 / White 7 / BAR-Replay "/" Replay-Replay-Black 7 / Net 7 / White 7 / BAR "), and a combination of 15 (9) to (12) symbols -Replay-Black 7 / Net 7 / White 7 / BAR "and the combination of 15 (D) symbols is" Bell-Bell-Bell ".

  Then, when the small roles GR (1) to (4) are won, when the left reel is set to the first stop, the “bell” constituting 15 (D) is stopped on the winning line L, and the second reel After the stop, the “bell” is also stopped on the middle and right reels to win 15 (D). On the other hand, when the reels other than the left reel are set to the first stop, the “replay” constituting 15 sheets (1) to (4) is stopped on the winning line L, and then the operation of stopping the left reel is 15 When the timing is within the drawing range of the winning symbol among “Black 7”, “Net 7”, “White 7”, and “BAR” constituting the sheets (1) to (4), 15 (1 ) To (4), but the winning range of the winning symbol among “Black 7”, “Net 7”, “White 7”, and “BAR” that makes up 15 (1) to (4) If it is played at an external timing, no winning combination will be awarded.

  In addition, when the small roles GR (5) to (8) are elected, when the middle reel is set to the first stop, the “bell” constituting 15 (D) is stopped on the winning line L, After 2 stops, stop the “bell” on the left and right reels and win 15 (D). On the other hand, when the reels other than the middle reel are set to the first stop, the “replay” that constitutes 15 sheets (5) to (8) is stopped on the winning line L, and then the operation of stopping the middle reel is performed 15 When the timing is within the drawing range of the winning symbol among “Black 7”, “Net 7”, “White 7”, and “BAR” constituting the sheets (5) to (8), 15 (5 ) To (8), but the winning range of the winning symbol among “Black 7”, “Net 7”, “White 7” and “BAR” which constitutes 15 (5) to (8) If it is played at an external timing, no winning combination will be awarded.

  Further, when the small roles GR (9) to (12) are won, when the right reel is set to the first stop, the “bell” constituting 15 (D) is stopped on the winning line L, After 2 stops, the “bell” is also stopped on the left and middle reels and 15 (D) are awarded. On the other hand, when the reels other than the right reel are set to the first stop, the “replay” that constitutes 15 sheets (9) to (12) is stopped on the winning line L, and then the stop operation of the right reel is 15 When the timing is within the drawing range of the winning symbol among “Black 7”, “Net 7”, “White 7”, and “BAR” constituting the sheets (9) to (12), 15 (9 ) To (12), but the winning range of the winning symbol among “Black 7”, “Net 7”, “White 7” and “BAR” which constitutes 15 (5) to (8) If it is played at an external timing, no winning combination will be awarded.

  In this way, even if a plurality of operating procedures with different winning combinations winning combinations depending on the combination of winning combinations are selected, the types of small roles can be reduced, so that the program specifications can be simplified. In addition, the program capacity can be reduced.

  Also, the combination of 15 (1) to (4) symbols is “Black 7 / Net 7 / White 7 / BAR-Bell-Bell”, and the combination of 15 (5) to (8) symbols is “Bell”. -Black 7 / Net 7 / White 7 / BAR-Bell "/" Bell-Bell-Black 7 / Net 7 / White 7 / BAR "), the combination of 15 symbols (9) to (12) is" Bell -Bell-Black 7 / Net 7 / White 7 / BAR ", and a combination of 15 (D) symbols may be" Bell-Bell-Bell ".

  In this case, when the small roles GR (1) to (4) are won, the “bell” is stopped on the winning line L when the left reel is set to the first stop, and after the second stop, the middle Also, stop the “bell” on the right reel and win 15 cards (D). On the other hand, even when the reels other than the left reel are set to the first stop, the “bell” is stopped on the winning line L, and then the stop operation of the left reel constitutes 15 sheets (1) to (4). If the timing is within the drawing range of the winning symbol among “Black 7”, “Net 7”, “White 7” and “BAR”, one of 15 (1) to (4) will be awarded. , 15 of the “Black 7”, “Net 7”, “White 7”, and “BAR” that make up the 15 (1) to (4), if the timing is outside the drawing range of the winning symbol, 15 Even within the pull-in range of “Bell” that constitutes (D), “Bell” is not stopped and no winning combination is awarded.

  Also, when the small roles GR (5) to (8) are elected, when the middle reel is set to the first stop, the “bell” is stopped on the winning line L, and after the second stop, the left and right reels are stopped. Also, stop “Bell” and win 15 (D). On the other hand, even when reels other than the middle reel are set to the first stop, the “bell” is stopped at the winning line L, and then the middle reel stop operation constitutes 15 sheets (5) to (8). If the timing is within the drawing range of the winning symbol among “Black 7”, “Net 7”, “White 7”, and “BAR”, one of 15 (5) to (8) will be awarded. , 15 of the “Black 7”, “Net 7”, “White 7”, and “BAR” constituting the 15 (5) to (8) are made at a timing outside the drawing range of the winning symbol. Even within the pull-in range of “Bell” that constitutes (D), “Bell” is not stopped and no winning combination is awarded.

  Also, when the small roles GR (9) to (12) are elected, when the right reel is set to the first stop, the “bell” is stopped on the winning line L, and after the second stop, the left and middle reels are stopped. Also, stop “Bell” and win 15 (D). On the other hand, even when the reels other than the right reel are set to the first stop, the “bell” is stopped on the winning line L, and then the stop operation of the right reel constitutes 15 sheets (9) to (12). If the timing is within the drawing range of the winning symbol among “Black 7”, “Net 7”, “White 7”, and “BAR”, any of 15 (9) to (12) will be awarded. , 15 of the “Black 7”, “Net 7”, “White 7”, and “BAR” constituting the 15 (5) to (8) are made at a timing outside the drawing range of the winning symbol. Even within the pull-in range of “Bell” that constitutes (D), “Bell” is not stopped and no winning combination is awarded.

  Even in such a case, even if multiple operating procedures with different winning combinations winning combinations depending on the combination of winning combinations are selected, the types of small roles can be reduced, so that the program specifications can be simplified. In addition, the program capacity can be reduced, and the “bell” always stops at the first stop reel. Therefore, when the first stop reel stops, the small role is always stopped by the winning procedure. Whether or not an operation has been performed cannot be determined, and it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation that the selection of the first stop reel is correct even after the first stop.

  In addition, the first stop reel to which the small role always wins is determined according to the type of the small role GR, and when a reel other than the first stop reel to which the small role always wins is set as the first stop, Even when 15 (D) structural symbols are stopped on the line, since 15 (D) are not awarded, a plurality of winning lines (for example, left, middle and right reels are stopped at the middle stage) L1 through the symbol, L2 through the symbol stopped at the top of the left, middle and right reels, L3 through the symbol stopped at the bottom of the left, middle and right reels, top of the left reel, middle of the middle reel, right reel L4 that passes through the symbol stopped at the bottom, L5 below the left reel, middle of the middle reel, L5 that passes through the symbol stopped at the top of the right reel, etc. Both the composition figures of the small roles stop on the winning line Even when, in the case where the reel other than the first stop reel small win to win always the first stop, it is possible to prevent to win 15 sheets of (D). In other words, since it is not necessary to limit the winning line to one line, the reel stop mode can be diversified even when a plurality of operating procedures having different winning combinations winning combinations are determined depending on the combination of winning combinations. It becomes possible.

  Further, in this embodiment, 15 sheets (1) to (12) and 15 sheets (A) to (C) simultaneously elected in the small roles GR (1) to (12) are the same payout number, and 15 sheets. Whether or not the reels to be stopped first are notified by the stop order notification as compared with the case where the number of payouts (A) to (C) is smaller than the number of payouts 15 (1) to (12). Therefore, the expected payout value can be further changed depending on whether or not the stop order notification is made.

  For example, when 14 sheets (A) to (C) are applied instead of 15 sheets (A) to (C) and the first stop reel that the small role always wins is selected, the payout of one of the small roles to be won If the number is less than the number of payouts of the other small combination that is won at the same time, the small combination GR (1) to (4) is won, and if the left reel is the first stop, the small combination GR (5 ) To (8) are elected and the middle reel is in the first stop, and the small payout GR (9) to (12) is elected and the right reel is in the first stop, the expected payout value ({(15 × 5/21 + 14 × 16/21) × 3 + (15 × 6/21 + 14 × 15/21)} / 4) is 14.25, while small roles GR (1) to (4) are elected, If the reels other than the left reel are in the first stop, the small roles GR (5) to (8) are elected, and if the reels other than the middle reel are in the first stop, The expected payout ((15 × 5/21 × 3 + 15 × 6/21) / 4) when the roles GR (9) to (12) are elected and the reels other than the right reel are set to the first stop is 3. The expected payout value (14.25 / 3 + 3.75 × 2/3) when any one of the small roles GR (1) to (12) is won in a state where the stop order is not notified is 7.25. The payout expected value when any of the small roles GR (1) to (12) is won in a state where the stop order is notified is 14.25, and the difference is seven.

  On the other hand, 15 sheets (1) to (12) in the small roles GR (1) to (12) and 15 sheets (A) to be won simultaneously with these 15 sheets (1) to (12) as in the present embodiment. When (C) is the same payout number, the expected payout value (15/15) when any of the small roles GR (1) to (12) is won in a state where the stop order is not notified as described above. 3 + 3.75 × 2/3) is 7.5, and the expected payout value when any of the small roles GR (1) to (12) is elected in a state where the stop order is notified is 15 The difference is 7.5, and when the first stop reel that the small role always wins is selected, the payout number of one of the small roles winning is larger than the payout number of the other small role winning simultaneously Expected payout value based on whether or not the reel to be stopped first is notified by the stop order notification than when the number is reduced The difference is large.

  In this embodiment, in the small roles GR (1) to (12), 15 sheets (1) to (12) and 15 sheets (A) to (C) won simultaneously with these 15 sheets (1) to (12). ) Is the same number of payouts, but when the first stop reel that the small role always wins is selected, the payout number of one small role that is won is made larger than the payout number of the other small role that is won simultaneously This makes it possible to further increase the difference in expected payout depending on whether or not the reel to be stopped first is notified by the stop order notification.

  Also, in this embodiment, the replay that triggers the termination of RT (1) depending on whether the replay GR (1) is won, the replay GR (2) is won, or the replay GR (3) is won. If the first stop reel that the replay other than (1) will win is different and one of the replay GRs (1) to (3) is won, the replay is intentionally replayed (1) if the type is not known. The continuation game of RT (1) depending on whether or not the reel to be stopped first is notified by the stop order notification, utilizing the fact that the first stop reel that will be awarded by a replay other than the above cannot be selected. The number can be changed.

  Further, whether or not the order of stop operations in which a small role can always be won from a plurality of different orders and the order of stop operations in which a replay other than replay (1) is won allow the occurrence of winning. Since it is determined only by the internal lottery to be determined, the control for determining the order of these stop operations is not complicated, and the game result is not influenced by the lottery result other than the internal lottery. There is no risk of harming the fairness of the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, stop order notification is executed when the small roles GR (1) to (12) are won in RT (1), which will be described later, and when the replays GR (1) to (3) are won. In RT (1), the player needs to perform a stop operation (so-called “eye-opening”) with an operation timing in order to win a small role or avoid the end of RT (1). Since the game digestion speed in RT (1) can be increased, the operation of the slot machine can be increased.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a performs stop order notification at a higher rate when the special combination is won than when the special combination is not won in the normal gaming state. By being executed, the possibility of winning the special role is suggested.

  The stop order notification includes a first stop order notification and a second stop order notification. When the sub CPU 91a executes the stop order notification, the sub CPU 91a selects one of them and notifies the selected type of stop order notification. Run. At this time, when the special combination is won, the second stop order notification is selected at a higher rate than when the special combination is not won. It is suggested that there is a higher possibility that the special combination is won than when the first stop order notification is executed.

  As in this example, when a special role and a small role are elected, when a stop operation is performed at the timing when the drawing pattern of the selected special role and the constituent symbol of the selected small role overlap In the case of controlling the drawing of the special role composition over the small role composition symbol, when the small role is elected in the state where the special role is carried over, the small role is elected alone In comparison with, it is difficult to win a small role because it is difficult to win a small role, so if a stoppage notification is not given after the special role is announced, the small role will be awarded. However, there is a problem that the player becomes more difficult and disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, in order to avoid such a problem, it is conceivable to arrange the symbols so that there is no stop operation position at which the special symbols and the small symbols can be aimed at the same time. In addition to greatly restricting the degree of freedom of the symbol arrangement, it is not possible to arrange the symbols so that there is no stop operation position that can aim at all the special symbols and all the small symbols at the same time. It is virtually impossible.

  In contrast, in this embodiment, after the special role finalizing effect, when the small roles GR (1) to (12) are won, stop order notification is executed at a rate of 100%, and the special roles are carried over. If a small role is elected in a state where the small role is elected, the drawing of the small role will be pulled in compared to the case where the small role is elected alone by controlling the drawing of the special character's composition in preference to the small character's structural symbol. Even in situations where it is difficult to win a small role due to restrictions, the stop must be in a stop order that allows the small role to be awarded, and at a timing that is outside the drawing range of the constituent symbols of the special role By prompting the operation, it is possible to prevent the winning of the winning small role as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage from being caused by the player missing the winning small role after the special role finalizing effect. In addition, by executing the post-confirmed small role announcement effect, it is possible to prevent the winning of the small role won after the special character final effect without considering the symbol arrangement only for limited situations such as after the final effect. The symbol arrangement is not greatly limited.

  Further, in the stop order notification after confirmation, the stop order notification executed in a state where the confirmation effect is not executed is notified in a different notification mode, and after the confirmation effect, the stop order notification is performed. Even if it is executed, the winning of special role can be surely recognized.

  Further, in this embodiment, after a final production, when no other role is won in addition to the special role, the special role winning is promoted by notifying the type of the special role at a rate of 100%. The recommended performance is executed, and it is possible to properly grasp a game that is preferable for winning the special role in a state where the winning of the special role is already announced.

  In this embodiment, after the finalized effect, when no other role is won in addition to the special role, the special role winning recommended directing is executed to promote the special role winning. By redoing, it may be possible to encourage winning of a special role.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a has the same lottery probability for the special role and the small role as in the normal gaming state after the end of CB (1) and CB (2) or when the replay (14) wins. Replay time (1) (RT (1)) in which the winning probabilities of replay GR (1) to (3) are higher than the normal gaming state and RT (1), and the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 1. ) To control. Then, RT (1) does not win any special role, and replay (1) does not win, and reaches the specified number of games (200 games in this embodiment) or before reaching the specified number of games. The game is ended when one of the special roles is won or the replay (1) wins and the process shifts to RT (2) described later. If any special role is won during RT (1), RT (1) will not end even if Replay (1) wins, and the specified number of games will be reached. The RT (1) will not end until the winning special role wins.

  As described above, in this embodiment, after RT (1) starts, even if any special role is won before reaching the specified number of games, if the selected special role does not win, If RT (1) does not end with winning, and if the selected special combination is not won, it is possible to continue to control RT (1) until the specified number of games is reached. ) Even if a special role is won, if the selected special role is not won, RT (1) can be consumed until the specified number of games is reached, giving the player a sense of loss. There is nothing.

  In addition, since the winning flag of the special role is carried over after the next game until the special role is won, after the RT (1) reaches the specified number of games, the special role won during that time is awarded. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the special role at the end of RT (1).

  When Replay (1) wins during RT (1), if no special role is won, RT (1) ends even if the specified number of games is reached after the start of RT (1) However, if Replay GR (1) is won, the left reel is selected. If Replay GR (2) is selected, the middle reel is selected. If Replay GR (3) is selected, the right reel is selected. By making each first stop, winning of replay (1) can be avoided.

  As a result, even after the start of RT (1), even if replay GR (1) to (3) is won, RT (1) is controlled by an operation procedure for avoiding winning of replay (1), that is, by a player's technical intervention. Since it can be continued, the interest associated with RT (1) can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, when any of the replays GR (1) to (3) is won, if the type is not known, the replay (2) to (13) will intentionally select the first stop reel. It is impossible to win, and replays other than replay (1) can be won with a probability of 1/3, but replay (1) wins with a probability of 2/3, and any special role is won. If not, RT (1) ends. Thereby, the operation procedure for avoiding the replay (1) changes depending on whether the replay GR (1) is won, the replay GR (2) is won, or the replay GR (3) is won. Since there is no procedure for reliably avoiding the replay (1), the player infers which replay GR is won, and whether or not the RT (1) is continued is determined by whether or not it is won. Therefore, the interest associated with RT (1) can be further enhanced.

  In addition, even if an operation is performed in a procedure that avoids replay (1), other replays always win, so even if replay (1) is avoided, the player will not suffer any disadvantage.

  In addition, since replay (1) may be won simultaneously with CB (1) to (4), replay (1) wins during RT (1) and the termination condition of RT (1) is satisfied. However, since CB (1) to (4) may be won at the same time, even if the termination condition for RT (1) is satisfied, CB (1) to (4) should be expected to win Can do.

  The sub CPU 91a performs stop order notification for notifying the first stop reel that the small combination always wins when the small combination GR (1) to (12) is won in RT (1), and the replay GR (1) to When (3) is won, control is performed to assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT) for performing stop order notification for notifying the first stop reel that can avoid replay (1) winning.

  In other words, when the assist time is controlled, when the small combination GR (1) to (4) or the replay GR (1) is won, a stop order notification for executing the left reel as the first stop is executed, and the small combination GR ( When 5) to (8) or replay GR (2) is won, stop order notification is executed with the middle reel as the first stop, and the small role GR (9) to (12) or replay GR (3) When winning, stop order notification is executed with the right reel as the first stop.

  In this embodiment, as described above, when Replay (1) wins in a state where no special role is won in RT (1), it is before the specified number of games is reached from the start of RT (1). However, RT (1) ends, but when replay GR (1) to (3) is won in RT (1) as described above, if replay (1) is intentionally unknown, ) Is impossible, and replay (1) can be avoided with a probability of 1/3, but replay (1) wins with a probability of 2/3 and RT (1) ends. End up.

  On the other hand, when no special combination is won in RT (1), when replay GR (1) to (3) is won and stop order notification is executed, the first stop is assumed. It becomes possible to recognize the reels that should be, and to specify the stop order that intentionally avoids the replay (1).

  For this reason, in a state where no special combination is won in RT (1), when replay GR (1) to (3) is won, stop order notification is executed, so that replay (1) is executed. The player can know the operation procedure for avoiding the winning of the player, and the player can intentionally avoid the winning of the replay (1) to avoid the end of the RT (1) and continue the RT (1). It becomes possible. That is, at least during the control by the AT, RT (1) can be continued by selecting the first stop reel notified by the stop order notification.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the small roles GR (1) to (4) are won, the small roles GR (5) to (8) are won, or the small roles GR (9) to (12) are selected. ) Has been won, the first stop reel to which the small role always wins is different, and if any of the small roles GR (1) to (12) is won, if the type is not known intentionally Although it is impossible to select the first stop reel to which the small combination always wins, if the stop order notification is executed when the small combination GR (1) to (12) is elected, It becomes possible to recognize the reels to be played, and it is possible to intentionally specify the stop order in which the small part always wins.

  For this reason, when the small roles GR (1) to (12) are elected in RT (1), the stop order notification is executed, so that it is possible to know the operation procedure that the small role always wins. The player can win more medals during RT (1) by intentionally selecting the first stop reel that the winning combination always wins.

  Whether or not to control to AT is determined by AT lottery executed at the time of winning CB (1), CB (2), and Replay (14). If the AT lottery is won, the number of AT games controlled by the AT is further selected, and the selected number of AT games is set in the RAM 91c. In addition, when an AT lottery is won with the number of AT games remaining in the RAM 91c, the number of newly selected AT games is added to the number of AT games remaining in the RAM 91c. Then, the sub CPU 91a controls the AT over the number of AT games set in the RAM 91c on the condition that it is controlled to RT (1).

  The winning probability of the AT lottery is determined by whether the game won by CB (1), CB (2), and Replay (14) that is the opportunity to perform this AT lottery is in a confirmed state (question effect period described later) or high. In the AT lottery in which CB (1), CB (2), and Replay (14) are won in the final state, depending on whether the state is a probability state or a low probability state, AT is performed at a rate of 100%. In addition, the number of AT games selected at the time of winning is higher than the number of games in the high probability state and the low probability state. In the AT lottery performed by winning CB (1), CB (2), and Replay (14) in the high probability state, CB (1), CB (2), and Replay (14) are performed in the low probability state. The winning probability of AT is higher than in the case of winning, and the proportion of AT games selected at the time of winning is higher than that in the low probability state.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not to perform the question effect at a predetermined rate on the condition that the replay (1) wins and no special role is won. If it is decided to perform, the control is performed during the question effect period (AT confirmed state). The question production period lasts for 3 games, and during this time, when CB (1), CB (2), and Replay (14) are won, the AT is won at the rate of 100% as described above, and then RT ( In 1), controlled by AT. In addition, during the question production period, questions are presented, and the player can select an answer by touch operation, or a quota is presented, and the player can perform the quota by touching it The question production is executed for each game.

  Then, after the end of the question effect period, the sub CPU 91a controls the AT to a high probability state over the number of games (the number of correct answers × 10 games) corresponding to the number of correct answers in the question effect (the number of times the quota has been achieved).

  There are nine types of question effects, and one type is selected in a predetermined order during one question effect period. Each type of question has three levels of difficulty, and as shown in FIG. 17, the difficulty increases each time one question is answered correctly (the quota is achieved).

  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a display screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 for the question presentation. The display screen during the question presentation includes a question document display area in which a question document is displayed for each type of question, and a question. The question video display area where the video corresponding to the type of the question is displayed, the operation explanation display area where the operation method according to the type of the question is displayed, and the number of correct answers (achievement of quota) during one question production period A correct answer number display area to be displayed and a time limit display area to display the time limit are provided.

  In the question production, the question document, the explanation of the question, and the correct answer example are displayed in the question document display area, the operation explanation display area, and the question video display area at the same time as the game starts, and the time limit is reached when all the reels are stopped. At the same time as the countdown starts, the answer (touch panel operation) is made possible.

  After that, if there is a correct answer within the time limit (achievement of quota), the correct answer is displayed (“○” is added to the correct answer number display area). If there is an incorrect answer within the time limit, it is valid. If there is no valid answer (without achieving the quota) and the time limit has elapsed, an incorrect answer is displayed ("x" is added to the correct answer number display area), and there is no valid answer (to achieve the quota) If the next game start operation is performed before the time limit elapses, the process proceeds to the next effect as the same treatment as an incorrect answer.

  In this embodiment, when the next game start operation is performed before the time limit elapses, the question effect is canceled and the next effect is shifted to. Even if the game is executed, it is possible to participate in the question production until the game start operation is performed. The production may be canceled.

  There are nine types of question selection: picture judgment, group judgment, picture memory, amida memory, box count, mole hitting, shuffle, operation code, and calculation power.

  Picture judgment is a problem of searching for a designated picture. In the picture determination, as shown in FIG. 21A, the designated picture is displayed on the left side of the question video display area, and the designated picture and the similar picture are displayed on the 25 selection areas on the right side. Then, when a picture displayed in the selection area is selected by touching and the designated picture is selected, as shown in FIG. 21B, the mode of the selected designated picture changes, and FIG. As shown, the correct answer is obtained by selecting all the designated pictures displayed in the selection area within the time limit, and the incorrect answer is obtained when all of the designated pictures displayed in the selection area cannot be selected within the time limit. If the selected pattern is not a designated pattern, the time limit is shortened by 1 second as a penalty. The difficulty level of the pattern judgment changes depending on the length of the time limit (for example, the time limit is 12 seconds for difficulty level 1, the time limit is 8 seconds for difficulty level 2, and the time limit is 5 seconds for difficulty level 3). The shorter the time limit, the higher the difficulty.)

  The question data for design judgment is not predetermined, and is created for each question by the sub CPU 91a. Specifically, one of the five types of pre-stored pattern data is designated by lottery, three of the 25 selected areas are randomly determined by lottery, and the designated pattern is placed at the determined position. Further, the arrangement positions of the remaining four patterns are randomly determined by lottery, and question data is created by arranging the remaining patterns at the determined positions.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a, when a game in which a question effect for determining a picture is executed, wins a special question when one of CB (1) to (4) or replay (14) in which RT (1) is determined is won. Create data. The special question data is question data in which only one designated pattern is placed in the selected area and no picture is placed in the other selected areas. Just by selecting only one pattern placed in the selected area, Therefore, it is much easier to obtain a correct answer than normal question data, and the correct answer can be estimated at a glance.

  Group judgment is a problem of searching for a group that is combined with the same pattern as the presented pattern group. In the group judgment, as shown in FIG. 22 (a), the question data is displayed on the upper side of the question video display area, and one answer data of the group combined with the same pattern as the question data is displayed on the lower selection area. Three answer data of the group including a pattern different from the data are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), the answer is made by touching and selecting the answer data of the group combined with the same pattern as the question data within the time limit, and the other answer data is selected by touching. If it is not selected within the time limit, it will be incorrect. The difficulty level of group judgment varies depending on the number of pictures constituting one group (for example, the number of constituent pictures is 4 for difficulty level 1, the number of constituent pictures is 6 for difficulty level 2, and the difficulty level is 3). Then, the number of constituent pictures is set to nine, and the difficulty increases as the number of constituent pictures increases.)

  The question data and answer data for group judgment are not predetermined and are created for each question by the sub CPU 91a. Specifically, the number of designs corresponding to the degree of difficulty is randomly extracted by lottery so that the selected design is not extracted from 12 types of pre-stored design data, and the extracted designs are arranged randomly. By creating question data by creating a correct answer data by randomly rearranging the same pattern as the question data, by rearranging one pattern of the question data with another pattern at random Create incorrect answer data. At this time, the question data and the answer data are created so that there is no plurality of correct answer data or no correct answer data.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a receives a special response when any of CB (1) to (4) or replay (14) in which RT (1) is determined is won in the game in which the group judgment question effect is executed. Create data. The special answer data is that all the answer data is correct, and any answer data will be correct, so it is much easier to obtain the correct answer than normal answer data. You can guess the correct answer.

  The picture memory is a problem of determining which panel is designated after a plurality of panels are displayed. In the pattern memory, as shown in FIG. 23 (a), six panels with different patterns drawn are displayed in the question video display area, and after a certain period of time, as shown in FIG. And one of the six panels is displayed as the designated pattern. Then, as shown in FIG. 23 (c), touching and selecting a panel on which the same pattern as the designated pattern is displayed within the time limit will result in a correct answer, and other panels can be selected by touching or restricted. If you do not select it in time, it will be incorrect. It should be noted that the difficulty level of the pattern memory changes by increasing or decreasing the types of patterns that can be selected as the patterns displayed on the panel (for example, in difficulty level 1, six types are selected from six patterns and difficulty level 2 Then, six types are selected from 9 types of patterns, and 6 types are selected from 12 types of patterns at difficulty level 3, so that the more types of patterns that can be selected, the higher the difficulty level).

  The question data of the pattern memory is not predetermined, and is created for each question by the sub CPU 91a. Specifically, among the 12 types of pre-stored design data, 6 designs are randomly extracted by lottery so that the design selected once from the types of designs according to the degree of difficulty is not extracted. Are randomly arranged, and then the designated picture is determined from the arranged pictures to create question data. At this time, the question data is created so that there are a plurality of correct answers or no correct answer.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a, in the game in which the question effect of the picture memory is executed, has a special question when any of the replays (14) in which CB (1) to (4) or RT (1) is determined is won. Create data. Special question data is the same type of pattern placed on all panels, and since it is correct regardless of which panel is selected, it is much easier to obtain correct answers compared to normal question data. In addition, the correct answer can be estimated at a glance.

  Amida memory is the problem of hitting a character that can reach the goal of Amid lottery. In the amid storage, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), the start point of an amid lottery having a different start point is displayed for each of the three types of characters in the question video display area. As shown in FIG. 24 (b), the amid lottery is displayed. Is scrolled to the goal. Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), it becomes correct by touching and selecting a character that reaches the goal within the time limit, and if another character is selected by touching or not selected within the time limit, It is incorrect. Note that the difficulty level of Amida memory varies depending on the number of branches (vertical lines) of the Amida lottery (for example, the difficulty level is 5 for a branch, the difficulty level 2 is 7 and the difficulty level 3 is 10). As the number of branches increases, the difficulty increases.

  The question data stored in the amida memory is not predetermined, and is created for each question by the sub CPU 91a. Specifically, out of 13 types of amida data stored in advance (data having different numbers and shapes of branches), five amida data are randomly extracted by lottery so that the number of branches depends on the degree of difficulty. Question data is created by connecting the extracted amid data horizontally and randomly determining the position of the goal.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a determines a special question when any of the replays (14) in which CB (1) to (4) or RT (1) is determined is won in the game in which the question effect of Amida memory is executed. Create data. Special question data has no branches, and all positions are goals, and any character can be selected correctly, so it is much easier to obtain the correct answer than normal question data. Thus, the correct answer can be estimated at a glance.

  Box counting is a matter of how many boxes are stacked. In the box counting, as shown in FIG. 25A, a picture of the boxes stacked as question data is displayed on the upper side of the question video display area, and the number of different boxes is shown in the lower selection area. Multiple response data are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the answer is displayed by touching and selecting the answer data indicating the number of boxes displayed as the question data within the time limit, and the other answer data is selected by touching. If it is not selected within the time limit, it will be incorrect. Note that the difficulty of counting the number of boxes varies depending on the number of boxes stacked (for example, the number of boxes is 5 to 8 for difficulty 1, the number of boxes is 8 to 11 for difficulty 2, and the difficulty is 3. The number of boxes: the difficulty increases as the number of boxes increases by 11-14.

  The question data and answer data for counting the boxes are not predetermined, and are created for each question by the sub CPU 91a. Specifically, the number of boxes corresponding to the degree of difficulty is determined by lottery, and image data viewed from the front and back is created as question data according to the result of randomly stacking the determined number of boxes in the virtual space, and the created question A plurality of answer data including correct answer data indicating the number of data boxes is created. At this time, the question data and the answer data are created so that there is no plurality of correct answer data or no correct answer data.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a determines a special question when any of the replays (14) in which CB (1) to (4) or RT (1) is determined is won in a game in which a box count question effect is executed. Create data and response data. Special question data is a single question data box, and all special answer data is correct answer data, and any answer data will be correct, so normal question data and answer data Compared with, it is much easier to obtain the correct answer, and the correct answer can be estimated at a glance.

  Mole hitting is a question of touching the number of moles that will become normal within the time limit in the manner of hitting a mole. In mole hitting, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), five holes are displayed in the question video display area, and as shown in FIGS. 26 (b) and (c), moles appear from the holes and return again. Touching that area reduces the quota by one, touching the mole for the quota within the time limit results in a correct answer, and if you cannot touch the mole for the quota within the time limit, it becomes an incorrect answer. . Also, if a cat appears instead of a mole from the hole, touching that area will reduce the time limit by 1 second as a penalty. The difficulty of hitting the mole varies depending on the appearance speed of the mole, the number of norms, and the appearance frequency of the cat (for example, the higher the appearance speed of the mole, the more the norm, and the higher the appearance frequency of the cat, the higher the difficulty level). Become).

  The mole hitting control data is not predetermined, and the sub CPU 91a controls each question. Specifically, parameters such as the number of appearances and the norm for each appearance speed of moles and cats are determined according to the degree of difficulty, and the appearance timing and appearance position are randomly controlled based on the determined parameters.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a has a special parameter when any of the replays (14) in which CB (1) to (4) or RT (1) is confirmed is won in a game in which a mole striking question effect is executed. Control based on. The special parameters are that the appearance speed of moles and cats is slow, the number of appearances is relatively large, and the norm is 1. Compared with the normal parameters, it is much easier to achieve the norm, and the norm can be achieved at a glance. It can be assumed that it is easy.

  Shuffle is a problem in which a plurality of cards are shuffled and a winning pattern card is applied. In the shuffle, as shown in FIG. 27 (a), three cards containing one pattern are displayed in the question video display area, and as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the card is turned over and the position is shuffled. (Randomly move), as shown in FIG. 27 (c), after stopping the shuffle, if you touch and select a card with a pattern within the time limit, the answer will be correct. If it is not selected in time, it will be incorrect. Note that the difficulty level of the shuffle varies depending on the number and speed of movements (for example, the higher the number of movements and the higher the movement speed, the higher the difficulty level).

  The shuffle control data is not predetermined, and the sub CPU 91a determines and controls each question. Specifically, the initial position of the winning card is randomly determined by lottery, and parameters such as the number of movements, movement speed, and the ratio of the position after movement are determined according to the degree of difficulty, and the card moves based on the determined parameters. Is controlled randomly.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a has special question data when any of the replays (14) in which CB (1) to (4) or RT (1) is determined is won in the game in which the shuffle question effect is executed. And control based on special parameters. Special question data are all hit cards, special parameters are those with a small number of movements and a relatively slow movement speed, and the correct answer is much easier compared to normal parameters. You can guess the correct answer at a glance.

  The operation code is a problem of selecting a combination of operation codes and establishing a calculation formula. In the operation immobility, as shown in FIG. 28 (a), an equation where two operation codes are blank is displayed as question data above the question video display area, and combinations of operation codes are shown in the lower selection area. Multiple response data are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), a correct answer can be obtained by touching and selecting the answer data indicating the combination of operation codes that will establish the equation displayed as question data within the time limit. If the answer data is touched for selection or if it is not selected within the time limit, the answer is incorrect. Note that the difficulty level of the operation code varies depending on the content of the calculation formula (for example, it is more difficult to include x ÷ than a combination of only + −).

  The answer data of the operation code is not predetermined, and is created for each question by the sub CPU 91a. Specifically, the placement positions of the operation codes of the correct combinations and incorrect combinations are randomly determined by lottery, and the correct answer data and incorrect answer data positions are randomly determined by lottery. Create with. At this time, the question data and the answer data are created so that there is no plurality of correct answer data or no correct answer data.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a, in the game in which the question effect of the operational code is executed, has a special question when any of CB (1) to (4) or replay (14) in which RT (1) is determined is won. Create data and response data. The special question data is the question data “1 □ 1 □ 1 = 1”, and the special answer data is the answer data (XX, ÷÷, × ÷, + −, etc.) that are all correct answers, Since any answer data is selected as a correct answer, it is much easier to obtain a correct answer than normal question data and answer data, and the correct answer can be estimated at a glance.

  Time calculation is a problem of calculating time from a reference time indicated by a clock. In the time calculation, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), the condition of the reference time and the specified time (after ○ hour ○ minute, before ○ hour ○ minute) is displayed as question data on the upper side of the question video display area. A plurality of answer data indicating designated times are displayed in the selection area. Then, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), touching and selecting the answer data indicating the specified time that satisfies the conditions presented within the time limit results in a correct answer, and other answer data can be selected by touching. If it is not selected within the time limit, it will be incorrect. It should be noted that the difficulty level of the operation code varies depending on the reference time, the condition of the specified time, and the inclination of the clock (for example, the reference time is more difficult at a time other than 0: 0 and the specified time condition If the time is before the reference time, the difficulty is higher after the reference time, and the difficulty is higher when the question data and the answer data have a clock inclination).

  The question data and answer data for time calculation are not predetermined, and are created for each question by the sub CPU 91a. Specifically, the question data is created by randomly determining the criteria time and specified time conditions by lottery according to the degree of difficulty, and the incorrect specified time is randomly determined by lottery, and the correct specified time Response data is created based on the designated time that is determined to be incorrect. At this time, the question data and the answer data are created so that there is no plurality of correct answer data or no correct answer data.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a determines a special question when either CB (1) to (4) or replay (14) in which RT (1) is determined is won in a game in which a time calculation question effect is executed. Create data and response data. The special question data is the reference time is 0: 0 and the specified time condition is 0 hours and 0 minutes later, and the special answer data is all answer data that is correct (specified time indicating 0: 0). There is a correct answer no matter which answer data is selected. Therefore, it is much easier to obtain the correct answer than normal question data and answer data, and the correct answer can be estimated at a glance.

  In this way, in this embodiment, a question is presented, and the player can select a response by touch operation, or a quota is presented, and the player can perform the quota by touching it. In addition to executing a question effect, the AT is controlled to a high probability state of the AT by achieving a correct answer or a quota in the question effect. That is, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player by achieving the player's answer or quota in the question effect.

  In the present embodiment, the AT is controlled to a high probability state by achieving the correct answer or norm in the question effect, but the AT confirmed state by achieving the correct answer or norm in the question effect, In other words, CB (1) (2) or Replay (14) is elected in the meantime, so that it can be controlled to the gaming state controlled by AT in subsequent RT (1), or the correct answer in the question effect Or you may make it control by AT by achieving norm.

  Conventionally, there have been proposed gaming machines that can give a quiz to a player and allow the player to answer the quiz, and a gaming machine that can execute a mini game with different results depending on the player's selection. ing. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a privilege (notification of a stop procedure as a winning condition, a privilege image, etc.) is given to the player according to the result of the quiz selected by the player or the result of the mini game. However, in these conventional gaming machines, the player's expectation that the privilege is granted by raising the quiz is raised, but the privilege is simply given according to the result of the quiz. The content did not make any sense, and the problems that were given to the players were not fully utilized.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, on the condition that no special role is won, it is determined whether or not to control in the question effect period, and in the game in which the question effect during the question effect period is executed, CB When any one of (1) to (4) is won, question production is performed using special question data and answer data that is much easier to obtain correct answers than normal question data and answer data. In addition to raising the player's expectation for the transition to the AT high probability state by executing the question effect even if the special role is not elected, it was presented There is no need to select an answer for the question because the question is special question data and answer data that is much easier than usual, and until the question effect is executed after the control of the question effect period is decided. C in between But it is possible to suggest that it has won, it is possible to effectively utilize the problem that is presented to the player.

  In addition, since the question effect is executed only once per game and is executed every game during the question effect period over a plurality of games, after the start of the question effect period, when the first question effect is incorrect However, it can be challenged again in the subsequent question production, and the correct answer rate of the question production in the question production period (in this example, the answer production period is fixed to 3 games, so the correct answer rate is proportional to the number of correct answers) Since the number of games in the AT high probability state differs, even if the answer to the question effect is correct after the start of the question effect period, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the subsequent question effect.

  In addition, if CB (1) or CB (2) is elected during the question production period in which the question production is executed, it is always controlled by the AT in the subsequent RT (1), so the presented problem is markedly higher than usual. It is possible not only to indicate that the CB is elected by being easy special question data and answer data, but it is also possible to indicate that there is a high possibility of being controlled by the AT, which is presented to the player. Problem can be used more effectively.

  In addition, when a replay (14) in which RT (1) is determined in the question effect period in which the question effect is executed is won, in the subsequent RT (1), the game is always controlled by the AT and the question effect is executed. Even if Replay (14) is won, the question effect will be executed using special question data and answer data that is much easier to get the correct answer than normal question data and answer data. Not only indicate that the CB is elected by the question data and answer data being much easier than usual, but also suggest that the problem is likely to be controlled by the AT The problem presented to the player can be used more effectively.

  Further, in this embodiment, in a game in which a question effect (group judgment, picture memory, amida memory, box counting, shuffle, calculation memory, time calculation) for selecting a correct answer from a plurality of answer data is executed. If any one of (4) wins, special response data will be presented in which all the response data will be correct, and it appears to be the same problem as usual, but the player's choice Regardless of the fact that the correct answer is always presented, it is possible to guess the correct answer at a glance from the presented problem, so that the player can be surprised and the winning of the CB can be suggested. .

  Further, in this embodiment, when any one of CB (1) to (4) is won in a game in which a question effect (picture determination) that normally requires a plurality of items to be selected is selected. Special question data with only one possible item is presented, and it looks the same as usual, but presents the problem that there is only one item that the player can select By doing so, it is possible to guess the correct answer at a glance from the presented problem, so it is possible to give the player an unexpected feeling and suggest the winning of the CB.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any of the CBs (1) to (4) is won in a game in which a required number of quotas must be achieved (mole hitting), 1 is set as the norm. It is presented, and it looks like a normal problem, but it is possible to infer the achievement of the norm at a glance from the presented problem by presenting the problem with the minimum norm. Therefore, it is possible to give an unexpected feeling to the player and suggest winning of the CB.

  Further, in this embodiment, after all reels are stopped in the question effect, the touch operation, that is, the player can select the answer, but the next game start operation is performed before the time limit has elapsed. If the answer is canceled in the middle without selecting an answer based on the effect, the question effect is treated as an incorrect answer and the process proceeds to the next game effect. As a result, the AT is controlled to a high probability state on the condition that it participates in the question production, so that the player can increase the willingness to participate actively without canceling the question production. The intended effect can be enhanced by the question effect. On the other hand, if the start operation of the next game is performed, it becomes possible to cancel the question effect, and the player can select whether to participate in the question effect, so for a player who wants to advance the game first It is also possible to advance the game.

  In addition, in order to obtain an AT high probability state, it is necessary to actively operate a touch panel that is not directly related to the game, and in the question production, the player has to perform technical intervention that is not directly related to the game. Since motivation can be increased, it is possible to effectively utilize a function that enables production using the touch panel.

  Further, in this embodiment, the question data and answer data for question production are not predetermined, and the sub CPU 91a asks questions based on element data (such as pattern data and amida data) stored in advance. Multiple element data is randomly extracted by lottery according to the level of difficulty of the production, and the question data and answer data are created by combining the extracted element data, so a lot of question data and answer data It is possible to present various problems beyond the stored element data without storing, and to prevent the same problem from appearing repeatedly.

  Also, the control data of the question effect is not predetermined, and the sub CPU 91a randomly determines parameters such as speed and frequency for the difficulty level of the question effect by lottery and asks questions based on the determined parameters. Since the production is controlled, various controls can be performed without storing a lot of control data in advance, and the same movement can be prevented from repeatedly appearing.

  In this embodiment, when the replay (1) that may be won at the same time as the special role wins in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 41a determines that the lottery probability of the special role, the small role, and the replay (14) is the normal gaming state. Replay time (2) (RT (2) that is the same, but the winning probability of replay GR (1) to (3) is higher than the normal gaming state, and the medal payout rate per game is 1 or less. )) To control. Then, RT (2) does not win any special role, and replay (14) does not win and reaches the specified number of games (2 games in this embodiment) or before reaching the specified number of games. Either special role is won and the process proceeds to RT (3), which will be described later, or the replay (14) wins and the process proceeds to RT (1).

  In addition, when any special combination is won in the normal gaming state, RT (2) (including the case where a special combination is selected at the same time as the re-playing combination), or after any special combination is selected in RT (1) When the replay (1) wins or the RT (1) is finished by reaching the specified number of games, the lottery probability of the small role and the replay (14) is the same as the normal game state, but the replay Control is performed to replay time (3) (RT (3)) in which the winning probabilities of GR (1) to (3) are higher than the normal gaming state, and the medal payout rate per game is 1 or less. RT (3) ends when the winning special combination wins and moves to CB. Note that RT (3) has no specified number of games, and once it has shifted, it continues until the special combination wins.

  In this way, when any special combination is won (including the case where one special combination is won at the same time), the transition to RT (3) where the winning probability of the re-playing combination is higher than in the normal gaming state. In addition, when a re-gamer and a special role are won at the same time, control is performed so that the combination of symbols constituting the re-gamer is preferentially drawn into the winning line over the combination of symbols constituting the special role. Even if a special role is elected, it is difficult to find a combination of symbols that make up the special role, making it difficult to determine whether or not the special role is won. It is possible to effectively maintain the player's expectation.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the replay (1), which is suggested to have won the special role in the normal game state, is won, the winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than that in the normal game state over a maximum of two games. When the transition is made to RT (2) and RT (2) or RT (3) is triggered when Replay (1) wins, even if the special role is won, It is difficult to determine the combination of symbols that make up, making it difficult to determine whether or not a special role has been won, and effectively increasing the player's expectation for the possibility of winning a special role suggested by winning a replay (1) Can last.

  In the present embodiment, when the replay (1) wins in the normal game state, the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not to execute a continuous effect by lottery, and when winning, executes a continuous effect over three games. Then, a continuous effect that leads to an effect result indicating whether or not any special role is won is executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the replay (1), which indicates that there is a possibility that the special role has been won, has been won by the continuous performance indicating whether or not the special role has been finally won. Since it is executed, the expectation for winning the special role can be enhanced by the continuous production, and the continuous production is executed redundantly with the RT which is difficult to determine whether the special role is won or not. The result of the continuous production, that is, the production result of whether or not the special role is won can be noted.

  Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of combinations are determined in advance as the production patterns of each game constituting the continuous production. When the sub CPU 91a starts the continuous production, the sub CPU 91a selects the combination of the production patterns at a ratio according to whether or not the special combination is won. For example, if the ratio of the first combination selected from the first combination and the second combination is higher when the special combination is won than when the special combination is not selected, the first combination When the continuous effect is executed, the expectation for winning the special role can be enhanced as compared with the case where the continuous effect is executed with the second combination.

  On the other hand, after the start of continuous production, even if it is before the end of the replay (1), which may indicate that there is a possibility of winning the special role, may win the prize. However, if the combination of performance patterns is determined in advance as described above, even if Replay (1) wins, there will be no change in the flow of continuous performance, and special effects by continuous performance The expectation of the role does not change.

  For this reason, in this example, when the replay (1) that indicates the possibility of winning the special role is won after the start of the continuous production, the continuous performance currently being executed is won. A combination of production patterns that can be expected to win special roles rather than a combination of production patterns, that is, a combination of production patterns that has a higher ratio than the current combination when selected for special roles. The continuous performance is executed based on the changed combination. As a result, after a continuous production showing the possibility of winning the special role, in particular, a continuous production based on a combination of production patterns that are not expected to be special, the replay (1 ) Won the prize, suggesting the possibility of winning the special role, and if that possibility increases, the content of the continuous production can also be expected to win the special role than the current one Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for winning the special role in accordance with an event that occurs during the continuous performance.

  In the present embodiment, after the rendition is started, when the replay (1) that indicates the possibility of winning the special role is won before the end of the rendition, the rendition of the continuous replay currently being executed Instead of the combination of patterns, it is changed to a combination of production patterns that can be expected to win special roles, and the remaining continuous production is executed based on the changed combination, but after the continuous production starts, When a replay (1) that indicates the possibility of winning a special role before the end wins, at least one game production pattern (for example, the production pattern of the remaining one game, etc.) among the remaining continuous productions , You may be allowed to change to a production pattern that corresponds to a combination of production patterns that can be expected to win a special role rather than the combination of production patterns that are initially executed. In this case, the replay (1) won further after the start of the continuous production showing the possibility of winning the special role, and suggests the possibility of winning the special role. When the possibility increases, the content of the performance of the continuous performance will also change to the content that can be expected to win the special role, so the game for winning the special role according to the event that occurred during the continuous performance The expectation of the person can be increased effectively.

  Next, a bonus effect that is executed when CB (3) or CB (4) wins will be described.

  When the CB (3) or CB (4) wins, the sub CPU 91a does not perform the winning notification effect as when the other combination wins, and further shifts to CB (3) and CB (4). Will continue to play the game state up to that point.

  Furthermore, the combination of CB (3) and CB (4) is composed of “watermelon” and “replay” that are smaller in size than conspicuous symbols such as “7” and more in number on each reel. In addition, it is composed of two or more kinds of symbols, and it is difficult to understand that the winning line L is aligned.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 30, when CB (3) or CB (4) wins and the game state shifts to CB (3) or CB (4), a winning announcement lottery is performed in a notice period of up to three games, By winning a prize winning lottery, a bonus notification effect is announced to notify that the player has shifted to CB (3) or CB (4). If the winning lottery is not won during the notice period, the bonus notice effect is forcibly performed at the end of the three games.

  The sub CPU 91a executes the first stop order notification at a higher rate than the second stop order notification when the small roles GR (1) to (12) are won in the normal gaming state. In the notification period, the second stop order notification is executed at a higher rate than the first stop order notification. In the notification period, the second stop notification is executed less frequently in the normal gaming state. The forward notification is executed at a high frequency. Since the announcement period is during CB and the left reel is in the first stop, the small role will always win, so in the stop order notification in the announcement period, the left reel must be in the first stop. The effect is notified.

  After the bonus announcement effect, the first bonus effect is executed until the total number of payouts in CB exceeds 100, which is the end condition of CB (4), and the total payout number in CB exceeds 100. Then, the first bonus effect is finished. And if it is CB (4), the bonus effect will be finished at the same time as the end of CB (4), while if it is CB (3), any timing until the end of the next game ( Continuation notice in the setting operation of bet number, start operation, stop operation is determined by lottery) until the total payout number in CB exceeds 253 which is the end condition of CB (3), The second bonus effect is executed, the second bonus effect is ended in a game in which the total number of payouts in the CB exceeds 253, and the bonus effect is ended with the end of CB (3).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when CB (3) or CB (4) wins, the CB (1) or CB (2) does not produce an effect indicating the CB winning as when CB (2) wins. Until the end of the notification period after the transition to CB (3) or CB (4), the bonus notification effect will be used for CB (3) or CB (4). Even if the CB (3) or CB (4) has actually won and has already moved to the CB (3) or CB (4) CB (3) or CB (4) can be recognized as having started suddenly without being related to winning, and the player can be surprised, so go to CB (3) or CB (4) The interests associated with the transition can be effectively enhanced.

  The combination of CB (3) and CB (4) is composed of “watermelon” and “replay” which are smaller in size than conspicuous symbols such as “7” and more in number on each reel. And it is composed of two or more kinds of symbols and it becomes difficult to understand that the winning line is aligned, so it is difficult to determine whether CB (3) or CB (4) has won, It can be impressed that CB (3) or CB (4) has started.

  In addition, the shift to RB at the same time as the transition to CB (3) or CB (4) greatly increases the probability of winning a small role, so when moving to CB (3) or CB (4) Since it is possible to recognize that the bonus announcement production has been executed after the sign state (notification period) in which the winning combination is frequently won, the small winning combination is frequently won by itself. Even if there is, it can raise a player's expectation.

  Further, when the small roles GR (1) to (12) are elected in the normal gaming state, the first stop order notification is executed at a higher rate than the second stop order notification, whereas in the notification period The second stop order notification is executed at a higher rate than the first stop order notification, and in the notification period, the second stop order notification is executed less frequently in the normal gaming state. Is executed at a high frequency, and it is possible to effectively enhance the player's expectation during the notification period by accompanying the second stop order notification.

  Also, CB (3) and CB (4) differ in the number of payouts as an end condition, that is, the amount of medals that can be acquired during CB, and the combination of CB (3) and CB (4) as described above. Even if it is aligned with the winning line, it is difficult for the player to understand. After the bonus notification, the same first bonus effect is executed in CB (3) and CB (4) in the first bonus effect period. When the first bonus effect ends, it is difficult to determine whether or not the CB continues thereafter, and it is possible to effectively increase the expectation that the CB will continue in the next game.

  Also, if the CB continues, there is a possibility that the continuation notification will be made at multiple timings during the period until the end of the next game. This makes it possible to effectively enhance the interest and maintain the expectation that the game will continue until the game ends.

  As described above, the first embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the drawings. However, the present invention is not limited to the first embodiment, and the present invention can be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say, it is included.

  For example, in the first embodiment, as a reel stop control method, stop control using a stop control table created from table creation data registered in advance in the ROM 41b (hereinafter also referred to as a table method) is applied. In addition, it is possible to search for a retractable position at each stop operation timing, and apply stop control (hereinafter also referred to as a control method) based on the search result, or stop control by both the table method and the control method (hereinafter referred to as table + (Also called a control method) may be applied.

  Moreover, you may use these several systems together. For example, as a result of the internal lottery, by using both the table-type stop control and the control-type stop control according to the reel stop time (first stop, second stop, or third stop), As a result of all the internal lotteries, it is not necessary to prepare a stop control table in advance for all the stop times of the reels, so that the storage capacity of the stop control table can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, after the completion of CB (1) and (2), or when the replay (14) is won, the process proceeds to RT (1). You may make it transfer to RT (1), and you may make it transfer to RT (1) after the end of other triggers, for example, one or both of CB (3) and CB (4). .

  In the first embodiment, if any special combination is won after the start of RT (1) but before reaching the specified number of games, RT (1) is not terminated and any special combination is When winning, replay (1), that is, when the falling role wins, or when the specified number of games is reached without winning the special role or falling role, RT (1) is ended. RT (1) may not be provided with the prescribed number of games, and after RT (1) starts, RT (1) may be ended when any special combination wins or when a falling combination wins. . In addition, after RT (1) is started without providing a falling combination, RT (1) ends when any special combination wins or when the specified number of games is reached without winning any special combination You may make it let it.

  In addition, in the state where any special role is elected, RT (1) will not end even if a fallen role wins during RT (1), but any special role will be elected. Regardless of whether or not the player falls down during RT (1), RT (1) may be terminated.

  In the first embodiment, a slot machine for setting bets using medals and credits is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a slot machine for setting bets using game balls, It may be a full credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball take-in device that takes in a game ball, and a take-in ball that detects a game ball taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 34b and a payout sensor 34c, a ball payout device for paying out game balls and a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls payed out by the ball payout device It is possible to set a bet number using both medals and game balls and play a game, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out by winning.

  Second Embodiment A slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. The configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment includes the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, and therefore, different points will be mainly described here.

  In the first embodiment described above, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1) to (3), CT, whereas in this embodiment, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (4) (5). , Consisting of CT.

  In this embodiment, after the end of CB (1) and CB (2), the main CPU 41a has the same lottery probabilities for special roles and small roles as in the normal game state, but the replay GR (1) to (3) and replay. The replay time (4) (RT (4)) in which the winning probability of (14) is higher than that in the normal gaming state and the medal payout rate per game exceeds 1 is controlled. Then, RT (4) does not win any special role, and replay (14) does not win and reaches the specified number of games (30 games in this embodiment) or before reaching the specified number of games. Either special winning combination is won or the replay (14) wins, and the process proceeds to RT (5) to be described later.

  In addition, when the replay (14) wins in the normal gaming state, RT (4), the lottery probabilities for the special role (when no special role is carried over) and the small role are the same as in the normal gaming state. The replay time (5) in which the winning probabilities of the replays GR (1) to (3) are higher than those in the normal gaming state and RT (4) and the medal payout rate per game is higher than that of RT (4). ) (RT (5)). Then, RT (5) does not win any special role, and replay (1) does not win, and reaches the specified number of games (200 games in this embodiment) or before reaching the specified number of games. The game is ended when one of the special roles is won or when Replay (1) wins. Also, if any special role is won during RT (5), RT (5) will not end even if Replay (1) wins, and the specified number of games will be reached. The RT (5) will not end until the winning special role wins.

  As described above, in this embodiment, after CB (1) (2) ends, RT (4) is controlled so that the winning probability of replay (14) that becomes a trigger for transition to RT (5) increases. Thus, the player's expectation for the transition to RT (5) can be enhanced by being controlled by RT (4).

  In RT (5), the payout rate of medals per game is higher than RT (4), the number of default games as the end condition is larger than RT (4), and more medals than RT (4). Therefore, the player's expectation to move to RT (5) can be further enhanced by controlling to RT (4).

  In RT (4) and (5), the expected increase rate of medals per game exceeds 1, and an increase in medals can be expected only by being controlled by RT (4). RT (5) By moving to, an increase in medals can be expected.

  RT (5) is the same as RT (1) of the first embodiment. When Replay (1) wins during RT (5), if no special role is won, RT (5) starts. RT (5) will end even before reaching the specified number of games, but if Replay GR (1) is won, the left reel will be played, if Replay GR (2) is won When the replay GR (3) wins the middle reel, the winning of the replay (1) can be avoided by setting the right reel to the first stop.

  As a result, even after the start of RT (5), even if replay GR (1) to (3) is won, RT (5) is controlled by the operation procedure for avoiding the replay (1) winning, that is, the technical intervention of the player. Since it can be continued, the interest associated with RT (5) can be enhanced.

  As in the first embodiment, the sub CPU 91a executes stop order notification for notifying the first stop reel that the small combination always wins when the small combination GR (1) to (12) is won in RT (5). When the replays GR (1) to (3) are won, the AT is controlled to execute the stop order notification for notifying the first stop reel that can avoid the winning of the replay (1).

  For this reason, in the state where no special combination is won in RT (5), when replay GR (1) to (3) is won, stop order notification is executed, so that replay (1) is executed. The player can know the operation procedure for avoiding the winning of the player, and the player can intentionally avoid the winning of the replay (1) to avoid the end of the RT (5) and continue the RT (5). It becomes possible. That is, at least during the control by the AT, the RT (5) can be continued by selecting the first stop reel notified by the stop order notification, and the small role GR (1) in the RT (5). When (12) is won, the stop order notification is executed, so that it is possible to know the operation procedure that the small role always wins, and the player intentionally makes the first stop that the small role always wins. By selecting a reel, more medals can be obtained during RT (5).

  In this embodiment, the AT lottery is executed when the replay (14) is won, and when the AT lottery is won, the AT is controlled until RT (5) ends.

  The winning probability of the AT lottery is whether the game won by the replay (14) that triggered the AT lottery is in a confirmed state (question effect period), in a high probability state, or in a low probability state. Therefore, in the AT lottery in which the replay (14) is won in the finalized state, the AT is won at a rate of 100%, and in the AT lottery in which the replay (14) is won in the high probability state, The winning probability of the AT is higher than when the replay (14) is won in the low probability state.

  The sub CPU 91a controls the question effect period (the AT is determined) after the end of CB (1) (2). The question production period lasts for three games. When replay (14) is won during this period, the AT is won at a rate of 100% as described above, and is controlled by AT in the subsequent RT (5). In addition, after the question effect period ends, the AT is controlled in a high probability state for the number of games (the number of correct answers × 10 games) corresponding to the number of correct answers in the question effect (the number of times the quota has been achieved). Since the question effect is the same as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, after the end of CB (1) (2), that is, at the beginning of RT (4) where the winning probability of replay (14) that triggers the transition to RT (5) is increased. Since the replay (14) wins at an early stage after the completion of CB (1) (2), it is surely controlled by the AT, and the replay (14) wins. Depending on the timing, the medal payout rate can be changed greatly.

  Even if the replay (14) is not won during the question production period, the AT is controlled to the high probability state according to the number of correct answers of the question production, so even if the game state is the same RT (4), the AT Since the AT winning probability differs depending on whether the replay (14) is won in the high probability state or the replay (14) is won in the AT low probability state, participation in the question effect can be actively encouraged.

  As described above, the second embodiment of the present invention has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the second embodiment, and changes and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as the first embodiment has the same effect as that described in the first embodiment. Further, the modified example illustrated for the first embodiment is also applicable to the second embodiment.

  In Example 2, the payout rate of medals per game also exceeds 1 in RT (4), but the expected increase rate of medals per game is 1 or less in RT (4), Alternatively, the value of RT (5) can be relatively increased by doing in this way, so that the player to transition to RT (5) by being controlled by RT (4) Can be further enhanced.

  Also, after RT (4) starts, when any special role is won, Replay (14) wins, and when moving to RT (5), any special role is not won and replay (14 ) Also ends RT (4) when the specified number of games is reached without winning, but when any special role is won, Replay (14) wins and RT (5) When a transitional role wins, no special role is won, replay (14), and when the specified number of games is reached without a falling role, RT (4) is ended. It is also possible to set a specific number of games in RT (4), and after RT (4) starts, if any special role is won, Replay (14) wins and moves to RT (5) End RT (4) when making a prize or when a faller wins a prize Unishi and may be.

  In addition, the process shifts to RT (4) after the end of CB (1) and (2). However, the process may shift to RT (4) after the end of either CB. For example, after one or both of CB (3) and CB (4) have been completed, RT (4) may be entered, or RT (4) different from RT (5) ) May be shifted to RT (4) when the combination of transitional roles is completed.

  A third embodiment of the slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. The configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment includes the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, and therefore, different points will be mainly described here.

  In the first embodiment described above, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1) to (3), CT, whereas in this embodiment, the gaming state is the initial gaming state, RT (6) to (8). ), CT.

  The initial gaming state is a gaming state other than CT, RT (6) to (8), after any CB ends, after a setting change, after RT (6) ends, after RT (7) ends, Transition is made after the end of RT (8). CT is the same as that in the first embodiment.

  In this embodiment, when the replays (2) to (13) win in the initial game state (excluding the state where any special part is elected), the special part (only when the special part is not carried over) ) And the small lottery probability is the same as the initial gaming state, but the replay time in which the lottery probability of the replay (14) is higher than the initial gaming state and the medal payout rate per game is less than one. (6) Control to (RT (6)). Then, RT (6) does not win any special role, and the predetermined number of games (in this embodiment, 200 to 250 games determined in advance for replays (2) to (13) that became the transition opportunity) Or any special role before winning the specified number of games.

  In addition, when replay (1) wins in the initial gaming state (excluding the state where any special role is elected), the lottery probability of the special role (only when the special role is not carried over) and the small role Is the same as the initial game state, but the replay time of the replay GR (1) to (3) is higher than the initial game state and the medal payout rate per game exceeds 1 (7) (RT (7)). Then, RT (7) reaches the specified number of games (100 games in this embodiment) without winning any special role, or wins any special role before reaching the specified number of games. It comes to end with.

  RT (7) can be shifted only from the initial gaming state, and even if Replay (1) wins during RT (6), RT (7) does not shift to RT (7). If controlled to 6), RT (6) will end, and until replay (1) wins in the initial gaming state, there will be no transition to RT (7).

  Replay (14) in the initial gaming state (excluding the state where any special combination is won), RT (6), RT (7) (excluding the state where any special combination is selected) When the player wins, the lottery probability of the special role (only when the special role is not carried over) and the small role is the same as the initial game state, but the lottery probability of the replay GR (1) to (3) is the initial game. The replay time (8) (RT (8)) is controlled with a higher probability than the state and a medal payout rate per game exceeding 1. The RT (8) continues until one of the special roles is won, and ends by winning one of the special roles.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the initial gaming state (excluding the state where any special role is elected), that is, after the end of CB, after the setting change, after the end of RT (6) or the end of RT (7) In a later gaming state, there is a possibility that both RT (6) in which an increase in medals cannot be expected and RT (7) in which an increase in medals can be expected. For this reason, once transitioning to RT (7) from the initial gaming state, an opportunity to transition to RT (7) again is provided even after RT (7) is completed, and RT (7) is periodically controlled. It becomes possible to do. On the other hand, when transitioning from the initial gaming state to RT (6), there is no transition to RT (7) until the end of RT (6), but when RT (6) ends, the initial gaming state is entered again. Even in such a case, an opportunity to shift to RT (7) periodically comes. In other words, the initial gaming state functions as a chance zone that may shift to RT (7) where an increase in medals can be expected, and even if such a chance zone shifts to RT (6), it shifts to RT (7). Even if you do, you will visit periodically.

  In addition, when Replay (1) wins in the initial gaming state, the game moves to RT (7) where an increase in medals can be expected. In this embodiment, when Replay GR (1) to (3) is won. It is impossible to win Replay (1) intentionally, and it is possible to shift Replay (1) to RT (7) with a probability of 2/3, but with a probability of 1/3. Since replays (2) to (13) win a prize, in this case, the transition is made to RT (6) where an increase in medals cannot be expected.

  As described above, in the slot machine of this embodiment, after RT (7) in which an increase in medals can be expected starts, if any special role is won before reaching the specified number of games, RT (7 RT (7) is terminated when any special combination wins, or when the specified number of games is reached without winning any special combination, and RT (7 ), Even if one of the special roles wins before the specified number of games is reached, RT (7) will not end with the winning of the special role if the selected special role does not win If the selected special role is not won, it will be possible to continue to control the RT (7) until the specified number of games is reached. If you do not win a special role, the prescribed game It is possible to digest the RT (7) until it reaches the, never would cause losses feeling to the player.

  In addition, since the winning flag of the special role is carried over after the next game until the special role is won, after the RT (7) reaches the specified number of games, the special role won during that time is awarded. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the special role at the end of RT (7).

  Further, in the initial game state, there is a possibility that the replay (1) will shift to RT (7) which is advantageous for the player who can expect an increase in medals by winning, while the replays (2) to (13) If any of them wins, an increase in medals cannot be expected, and there is a possibility of shifting to RT (6), which is disadvantageous for a player who does not shift to RT (7). When the replays (2) to (13) win in the initial gaming state, the game moves to RT (6), which is disadvantageous for the player. However, when RT (6) is finished, the game goes to the initial gaming state again. . For this reason, even if it transfers to RT (6) without shifting to RT (7) in the initial gaming state, it subsequently shifts to the initial gaming state again, so there is a possibility of periodically shifting to RT (7). The initial gaming state will come, and the player's expectation for RT (7) can be maintained.

  Further, in the initial game state, when replay GR (1) to (3) is won, an operation procedure that matches the winning conditions of replay (1) is performed, that is, RT (7) due to the technical intervention of the player. Since it can be shifted, the interest in the initial gaming state can be enhanced. At this time, the operation procedure as a winning condition changes depending on whether the replay GR (1) is won, the replay GR (2) is won, or the replay GR (3) is won. It is inferred whether the GR has been won, and whether or not to shift to RT (7) is determined depending on whether or not it is won, and the interest in the initial gaming state can be further enhanced.

  In addition, even when replays (2) to (13) win in the initial gaming state and the transition is made to RT (6) where an increase in medals cannot be expected, an increase in medals can be expected in RT (6). Since the winning probability of the replay (14) that will shift to RT (8) that continues until such special combination is won is higher than the initial gaming state and RT (7), an increase in medals cannot be expected (RT ( Even in the case of shifting to 6), the player's expectation for shifting to RT (8) can be enhanced.

  When the replay GR (1) to (3) wins in the initial gaming state, the sub CPU 91a performs stop order notification for notifying the first stop reel that can win the replay (1), and RT (7 ), When the small combination GR (1) to (12) is elected, the AT is controlled to perform stop order notification for notifying the first stop reel to which the small combination always wins.

  For this reason, when the replay GR (1) to (3) is won in a state where no special role is won in the initial gaming state, the replay (1) is performed by executing the stop order notification. It is possible to know the operation procedure that can be won, and the player can intentionally make a replay (1) win, thereby making the transition to RT (7) while avoiding the transition to RT (6). It becomes possible. That is, at least while being controlled by the AT, it is possible to shift to the RT (7) from the initial gaming state by selecting the first stop reel notified by the stop order notification.

  In addition, when the small roles GR (1) to (12) are won in RT (7), a stop order notification that notifies the first stop reel that the small role always wins is executed, so that the initial gaming state In addition, the payout rate of RT (7) can be significantly increased as compared to RT (6), and there is no need to perform a stop operation (so-called “push”) with an operation timing in order to win a small role. Since the digestion speed of the game in 7) can be increased, the operation of the slot machine can be increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, the AT lottery is executed at the time of winning CB (1) (2), and when the AT lottery is won, the replay GR (1) to (3) is further won in the initial gaming state. In this case, the stop order notification count for executing the stop order notification is selected, and the selected stop order notification count is set in the RAM 91c. Since the replay GRs (1) to (3) are elected in the initial gaming state and the stop order notification count is subtracted every time the stop order notification is executed, the stop order notification count, RT It becomes possible to shift to (7).

  The winning probability of the AT lottery is low if the game won by the CB (1) and CB (2) that is the opportunity to perform the AT lottery is in a confirmed state (question effect period), in a high probability state, or low. In AT lottery where CB (1) and CB (2) are won in the finalized state, depending on whether it is in the probability state, AT is won at a rate of 100%, and further, the stop order selected at the time of winning As the number of notifications, the rate at which a higher number of times than the high probability state and the low probability state is selected is high. Also, in the AT lottery performed by winning CB (1) and CB (2) in the high probability state, the AT winning probability is higher than in the case where CB (1) and CB (2) are won in the low probability state. Furthermore, there is a high ratio that the number of stop order notifications selected at the time of winning is higher than that in the low probability state.

  The sub CPU 91a controls the question effect period (AT confirmed state) at a predetermined rate on condition that the replay (1) wins and no special combination is won. The question production period lasts for 3 games. When CB (1) (2) is won during this period, as described above, the AT is won at the rate of 100%, and the AT is played in the initial game state and RT (7) thereafter. To be controlled. In addition, after the question effect period ends, the AT is controlled in a high probability state for the number of games (the number of correct answers × 10 games) corresponding to the number of correct answers in the question effect (the number of times the quota has been achieved). Since the question effect is the same as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when CB (1) (2) is won in the question production period, AT is determined, and it is possible to shift to RT (7) for the number of stop order notifications determined at that time. Therefore, the medal payout rate can be greatly changed according to the winning timing of CB (1) (2).

  Further, even if CB (1) (2) is not won during the question effect period, the CB (1) (2) is controlled in the AT high probability state because it is controlled according to the number of correct answers of the question effect. ) Or the CB (1) (2) wins in the AT low probability state, the AT winning probability varies, so it is possible to actively encourage participation in the question effect.

  As described above, the third embodiment of the present invention has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the third embodiment, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as in the first or second embodiment has the same effect as that described in the first or second embodiment. Further, the modified example illustrated for the first or second embodiment is also applicable to the third embodiment.

  In the above embodiment, replay is performed in the initial gaming state (excluding the state where any special combination is elected), RT (6), RT (7) (excluding the state where any special combination is elected). When (14) wins, RT (8) is controlled, but only in any specific gaming state (for example, initial gaming state), RT (8) when replay (14) wins. ), And in this way, by controlling to a specific gaming state, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation to move to RT (8). .

  Embodiment 4 of the slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. The configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment includes the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, and therefore, different points will be mainly described here.

  In the first embodiment, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1) to (3), and CT, whereas in this embodiment, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the single bonus (hereinafter referred to as SB). ), RT (9), and CB.

  In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the CB (1) to (4) of the first embodiment described above as a special role, single bonuses (1) to (12) (hereinafter referred to as SB (1) to (12)). Is stipulated. SB (1) is awarded when the combination of “net 7-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned on the winning line L in the normal gaming state or SB, and SB (2) is placed on the winning line L in the normal gaming state or SB. Wins when the combination of “Black 7-Watermelon-Watermelon” is complete, and SB (3) wins when the combination of “BAR-Watermelon-Watermelon” is aligned on the winning line L in the normal gaming state or SB. , SB (4) is awarded when the combination of “white 7-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned on the winning line L in the normal gaming state or SB, and SB (5) is the winning line L in the normal gaming state or SB. When the combination of “watermelon-net 7-watermelon” is complete, the winning combination is made, and SB (6) enters the winning line L in the normal gaming state or SB. -Black 7-Watermelon "is awarded when the combination is complete, and SB (7) is awarded when the combination of" Watermelon-BAR-Watermelon "is aligned on the winning line L in the normal gaming state or SB. (8) is awarded when the combination of “watermelon-white 7-watermelon” is aligned on the winning line L in the normal gaming state or SB, and SB (9) is entered on the winning line L in the normal gaming state or SB. When the combination of “Watermelon-Watermelon-Net 7” is complete, the winning combination is given. SB (10) is awarded when the combination of “Watermelon-Watermelon-Black 7” is complete on the winning line L in the normal gaming state or SB. , SB (11) is awarded when the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-BAR” is aligned on the winning line L in the normal gaming state or in SB. (12) In the normal game state or SB in the pay line L becomes a winning when aligned combination of "watermelon - White 7 - watermelon".

  If any of SB (1) to (12) wins in the normal gaming state and SB, only one game is controlled to SB where the winning probability of the small roles GR (1) to (12) is slightly increased.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state and SB, SB (1) + small role GR (1), SB (2) + small role GR (2), SB (3) + small role GR (3), SB (4) + small role GR (4), SB (5) + small role GR (5), SB (6) + small role GR (6), SB (7) + small role GR (7), SB (8 ) + Small role GR (8), SB (9) + small role GR (9), SB (10) + small role GR (10), SB (11) + small role GR (11), SB (12) + The small role GR (12) is a target of internal lottery, and SB (1) to (12) and the small roles GR (1) to (12) are not targeted for internal lottery alone. Also, in RT (9), which is shifted by winning one of CB (1) and (2), small roles GR (1) to (12) are independently subject to internal lottery, and SB (1) to Special roles including (12) are not eligible for internal lottery.

  The winning probabilities of the small roles GR (1) to (12) (including the case of simultaneous winning with SB (1) to (12)) are slightly higher in the SB than in the normal gaming state and RT (9). Become.

  Also, SB (1) to (12) are special roles, but unlike CB (1) and CB (2), they are effective only in the game whose winning flag is won, and SB (1) to (12 ) Will not be carried over to the next game even if they are elected and cannot win.

  In the present embodiment, SB (1) + small role GR (1) (SB (2) + small role GR (2) / SB (3) + small role GR (3) / SB (4) + small role GR ( 4)) is elected, 15 (1) (15 (2) / (3) / (4)) and SB (1) (SB) which is more special than 15 (A) (2) / (3) / (4)) is given priority over the control of winning line L, and only when SB (1) (SB (2) / (3) / (4)) cannot be aligned. 15 (1) (15 (2) / (3) / (4)) or 15 (A) can be won. Therefore, SB (1) + small role GR (1) (SB (2) + small role GR (2) / SB (3) + small role GR (3) / SB (4) + small role GR (4) ) Is elected and the left reel is in the first stop, “black 7” (15 sheets (2), “net 7” / 15 sheets (3) constituting 15 sheets (1) “White 7” / 15 sheets (“BAR” constituting (4)) is not limited, but “Net 7” constituting SB (1) (“Black” constituting SB (2)) 7 "/ SB (3) constituting" BAR "/ SB (4) constituting" White 7 "), the drawing of" Bell "constituting 15 sheets (A) is restricted. Also, SB (1) + small role GR (1) (SB (2) + small role GR (2) / SB (3) + small role GR (3) / SB (4) + small role GR (4)) To win the “watermelon” that constitutes SB (1) (SB (2) / (3) / (4)) when the middle reel or the right reel is first stopped. (1) Withdrawal of “Belle” (15 sheets (2) / (3) / (4)) and “Replay” which configures 15 sheets (A) is limited, and as shown in FIG. In the middle reel, SB (1) (SB (2) / (3) / (4)) constituting “SB” is arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less except for one location. ) + Small role GR (1) (SB (2) + small role GR (2) / SB (3) + small role GR (3) / SB (4) + small role GR (4)) Reel or When the reel is set to the first stop, the “watermelon” constituting SB (1) (SB (2) / (3) / (4)) at a ratio of 20/21 stops on the pay line L. Become. That is, SB (1) + small role GR (1) (SB (2) + small role GR (2) / SB (3) + small role GR (3) / SB (4) + small role GR (4)) In the case of winning, the left reel is set to the first stop, and “net 7” constituting “SB (1)” (“black 7” constituting SB (2) / “BAR” constituting SB (3) ”/ SB (4)“ White 7 ”) is outside the pull-in range, or the left reel is stopped, or the middle reel or the right reel is set to the first stop, and SB (1) (SB 15 sheets (1) (15 sheets (2) / (3) / only when the left reel is stopped outside the pull-in range of “watermelon” constituting (2) / (3) / (4)) (4)) or 15 (A) can be won, and if a stop operation is performed in the other operation procedure, SB (1) (SB (2) (3) / (4)) it is made so as not to be won either, one of the winning prize.

  SB (5) + small role GR (5) (SB (6) + small role GR (6) / SB (7) + small role GR (7) / SB (8) + small role GR (8)) won SB (5) (SB (6) / (SB) (5) (SB (6) / (8)) and 15 sheets (6) / (7) / (8)) 7) / (8)) is given priority over the winning line L, and only when SB (5) (SB (6) / (7) / (8)) cannot be aligned, 15 sheets (5) (15 (6) / (7) / (8)) or 15 (B) can be won. Therefore, SB (5) + small role GR (5) (SB (6) + small role GR (6) / SB (7) + small role GR (7) / SB (8) + small role GR (8) ) Is elected and the middle reel is set to the first stop, “Black 7” constituting 15 sheets (5) (“Net 7” constituting 15 sheets (6) / 15 sheets (7) constituting “White 7” / 15 (8) “BAR”) is not limited, but “SB 7” (SB (6) “Black 7”) is not limited. 7 "/ SB (7) constituting" BAR "/ SB (8) constituting" White 7 "), the drawing of" Bell "constituting 15 sheets (B) is restricted. In addition, SB (5) + small role GR (5) (SB (6) + small role GR (6) / SB (7) + small role GR (7) / SB (8) + small role GR (8)) To win the "watermelon" that makes up SB (5) (SB (6) / (7) / (8)) when the left reel or right reel is in the first stop. (5) Pull-in of “Belle” (15 sheets (6) / (7) / (8)) and “Replay” which configures 15 sheets (B) is restricted, and as shown in FIG. Since “watermelons” constituting SB (5) (SB (6) / (7) / (8)) in the left and right reels are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less except for one place, SB (5 ) + Small role GR (5) (SB (6) + small role GR (6) / SB (7) + small role GR (7) / SB (8) + small role GR (8)) is elected, left Reel or When the reel is set to the first stop, “watermelon” constituting SB (5) (SB (6) / (7) / (8)) at a ratio of 20/21 stops on the pay line L. Become. That is, SB (5) + small role GR (5) (SB (6) + small role GR (6) / SB (7) + small role GR (7) / SB (8) + small role GR (8)) In the case of winning, the middle reel is set as the first stop, and “net 7” constituting SB (5) (“black 7” constituting SB (6) / “BAR constituting SB (7)” ”/ SB (8) constituting“ White 7 ”), or the left reel is stopped, or the left reel or the right reel is set to the first stop, and SB (5) (SB (5) (15 (6) / (7) / 15) only when the left reel is stopped outside the range of the “watermelon” constituting (6) / (7) / (8)) (8)) or 15 (B) can be won, and when a stop operation is performed in the other operation procedure, SB (5) (SB (6) (7) / (8)) is adapted to either win, not even won any of the role.

  SB (9) + small role GR (9) (SB (10) + small role GR (10) / SB (11) + small role GR (11) / SB (12) + small role GR (12)) won In this case, 15 sheets (9) (15 sheets (10) / (11) / (12)) and SB (9) (SB (10) / (SB) which is a special role than 15 sheets (C) 11) / (12)) is given priority to the control of winning line L, and only when SB (9) (SB (10) / (11) / (12)) cannot be aligned, 15 sheets (9) (15 (10) / (11) / (12)) or 15 (C) can be won. Therefore, SB (9) + small role GR (9) (SB (10) + small role GR (10) / SB (11) + small role GR (11) / SB (12) + small role GR (12) ) Is elected and the right reel is set to the first stop, “Black 7” (15 sheets (9) is composed of “Black 7” (15 sheets (10) is composed of “Net 7” / 15 sheets (11)). “White 7” / 15 sheets (“BAR” constituting 12) is not limited, but “Net 7” constituting SB (9) (“Black” constituting SB (10)) is not limited. 7 ”/ SB (11)“ BAR ”/ SB (12)“ White 7 ”) is pulled in, the“ Bell ”constituting 15 sheets (C) is limited. Also, SB (9) + small role GR (9) (SB (10) + small role GR (10) / SB (11) + small role GR (11) / SB (12) + small role GR (12)) If the left reel or the middle reel is first stopped, 15 sheets are drawn to draw in the “watermelon” constituting SB (9) (SB (10) / (11) / (12)). (9) Withdrawal of “bell” constituting (15 sheets (10) / (11) / (12)) and “replay” constituting 15 sheets (C) is limited, and as shown in FIG. Since “watermelon” constituting SB (9) (SB (10) / (11) / (12)) in the left and middle reels is arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less except for one place, SB (9 ) + Small role GR (9) (SB (10) + small role GR (10) / SB (11) + small role GR (11) / SB (12) + When the winning combination (GR (12)) is elected and the left reel or the middle reel is the first stop, SB (9) (SB (10) / (11) / (12)) is given at a ratio of 20/21. The “watermelon” to be configured stops at the winning line L. That is, SB (9) + small role GR (9) (SB (10) + small role GR (10) / SB (11) + small role GR (11) / SB (12) + small role GR (12)) In the case of winning, the right reel is set to the first stop and “net 7” constituting “SB (9)” (“black 7” constituting SB (10) / “BAR” constituting SB (11)) ”/ SB (12)“ White 7 ”) is outside the pull-in range, or the right reel is stopped, or the left reel or the right reel is set to the first stop, and SB (9) (SB (10) / (11) / (12)) 15 (9) (15 (10) / (11) / (15) (15) (15) (15) / (11) / (12)) or 15 (C) can be awarded, and the stop operation is performed in other operating procedures. In either SB (9) (SB (10) / (11) / (12)) is winning, also so as not to pay any role.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the small roles GR (1) to (12) are won in the normal gaming state or SB, 15 (1) to (12), 15 are selected according to the SB simultaneously won. The pull-in of (A) to (C) is restricted. On the other hand, in RT (9), since the small roles GR (1) to (12) are elected alone, 15 (1) to (12) and 15 (A) to (C) are selected by winning the SB. ) Is not restricted.

  In this embodiment, the expected payout value per game in the normal gaming state (average value of the number of payouts per game) is less than 3, and the number of bets required to start the game in the normal gaming state is 3. Therefore, the number of medals decreases, and the payout rate of medals per game is less than 1. In SB, since the winning probabilities of the small roles GR (1) to (12) are slightly higher than in the normal gaming state, the expected payout per game is slightly higher but less than 3. The medals decrease, and the payout rate of medals per game is less than 1.

  In the normal gaming state and SB, as described above, the small roles GR (1) to (12) are elected simultaneously with any of SB (1) to (12), and 15 (1) to (1) ( 12) and 15 (A) to (C) will be limited, so the appearance rate of 15 (1) to (12) and 15 (A) to (C) is higher than the winning probability. Further, the actual expected payout value per game and the actual payout rate per game are further reduced.

  In this way, in the SB, the winning probabilities of the small roles GR (1) to (12) are slightly higher than in the normal gaming state, so the SB has a higher expected payout value per game and the medal per game is higher. The payout rate becomes higher than the normal gaming state, which is advantageous to the player, but the difference is slight.

  Further, while the substantial payout expected value in SB is less than 3, the payout number to be paid out when 15 sheets (1) to (12) and 15 sheets (A) to (C) are won is 15. Therefore, in the normal gaming state and SB, if any of SB (1) to (12) is won at the same time as the small roles GR (1) to (12), SB (1) to (12 More medals can be obtained by winning 15 (1) to (12) or 15 (A) to (C).

  In this embodiment, when any of CB (1) and (2) is won in the normal gaming state, the lottery probability of the small role is the same as in the normal gaming state, but the replay GR (1) to (3) Control is made to the replay time (9) (RT (9)) in which the composite probability is higher than the normal gaming state. RT (9) ends when the winning CB wins.

  The medal payout rate per game in RT (9) exceeds 1, so an increase in medals can be expected. However, when winning the small roles GR (1) to (12), if the type is not known, it is intentionally small. Since it is impossible to select the first stop reel that the winning combination always wins, considering this, the actual payout rate per game in RT (9) will be less than 1 and the number of medals will decrease. It becomes.

  When any of the CB (1) and (2) wins, the sub CPU 91a notifies the type of the selected CB, and the small role GR (1) to (12) wins at RT (9) to which the sub CPU 91a subsequently moves. In this case, the AT is controlled to perform stop order notification for notifying the first stop reel that the small combination always wins. In addition, in AT, in particular, if the number of 15 (1) to (12) and 15 (A) to (C) is limited depending on the type of CB that has been won, it will be won in addition to the stop order notification. An operation procedure for avoiding the CB configuration symbol (for example, when CB (1) is elected, a procedure for performing a stop operation aiming at “net 7” when the left reel is stopped) is notified. It is like that.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, even if any of the small roles GR (1) to (12) is won, if the type is not known, the first stop reel to which the small role is surely won is selected. Although it is impossible, at the assist time, when any of the small roles GR (1) to (12) is won, the stop order notification is executed, so that the small role always wins. It becomes possible to recognize the stop reel, and it is possible to select the first stop reel that the small part always wins.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the substantial payout rate of medals per game at RT (9) is less than 1 and the number of medals is reduced. Since it is possible to select the first stop reel that the small role always wins when winning the winning combinations GR (1) to (12), the medal payout rate per game in this case will exceed 1. .

  For this reason, when CB (1) or CB (2) is won and controlled by RT (9), the medal will increase while controlled by the assist time. It is possible to win more medals by continuing RT (9) without winning. On the other hand, after the assist time is over, medals decrease and CB lottery is not performed, so it is advantageous for the player to win the winning CB and finish RT (9). Become.

  In this embodiment, the AT lottery is executed when CB (1) (2) is won, and when the AT lottery is won, the number of AT games controlled by the AT is further selected and selected. The number of AT games is set in the RAM 91c. Then, the sub CPU 91a controls the AT over the number of AT games set in the RAM 91c on the condition that the control is performed by RT (9).

  The winning probability of the AT lottery is low if the game won by the CB (1) and CB (2) that is the opportunity to perform the AT lottery is in a confirmed state (question effect period), in a high probability state, or low. In AT lottery where CB (1) and CB (2) are won in the final state, depending on whether it is in the probability state, AT game is won at the rate of 100% and further selected at the time of winning As for the number, the ratio that the number of games more than that of the high probability state and the low probability state is selected is high. Also, in the AT lottery performed by winning CB (1) and CB (2) in the high probability state, the AT winning probability is higher than in the case where CB (1) and CB (2) are won in the low probability state. In addition, the number of AT games selected at the time of winning is higher than the number of games in a low probability state.

  The sub CPU 91a controls the question effect period (AT confirmed state) at a predetermined rate on condition that the replay (1) wins and no special combination is won. The question production period lasts for 3 games, and if CB (1) (2) is won during this period, as mentioned above, it wins AT at a rate of 100% and is controlled by AT at RT (9) thereafter. . In addition, after the question effect period ends, the AT is controlled in a high probability state for the number of games (the number of correct answers × 10 games) corresponding to the number of correct answers in the question effect (the number of times the quota has been achieved). Since the question effect is the same as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when CB (1) (2) is won in the question effect period, the AT is determined, so that the payout rate of medals can be changed greatly depending on the winning timing of CB (1) (2). it can.

  Further, even if CB (1) (2) is not won during the question effect period, the CB (1) (2) is controlled in the AT high probability state because it is controlled according to the number of correct answers of the question effect. ) Or the CB (1) (2) wins in the AT low probability state, the AT winning probability varies, so it is possible to actively encourage participation in the question effect.

  As described above, in the slot machine of this embodiment, when either CB (1) or CB (2) is won, it is controlled to RT (9) until the winning CB wins, and during RT (9) In this case, it is possible to expect an increase in medals on the condition that the first stop reel to which the small combination always wins when the small combination GR (1) to (12) is won is selected. That is, when either CB (1) or CB (2) is elected, it will be controlled to RT (9) which is advantageous to the player, and RT (9) will not continue from CB. Since the game state advantageous to the player continues in the flow from (9) to CB, the player's sense of expectation can be increased step by step before being controlled by the CB.

  Further, RT (9) can be expected to increase in medals on condition that the first stop reel that the small role always wins is selected at the time of winning the small roles GR (1) to (12) as described above. However, when winning the small roles GR (1) to (12), it is not possible to select the first stop reel for which the small role always wins. An increase cannot be expected.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, when CB (1) or CB (2) wins, not only the transition to RT (9) but also the AT lottery wins, so that the small roles GR (1) to ( 12) Since the stop time notification for notifying the first stop reel to which the small combination always wins is controlled when any one of 12) wins, the first stop reel to which the small combination always wins is controlled. It becomes possible to select. However, even if the first stop reel that the small role always wins is notified by the assist time, the medal cannot be increased unless the stop operation is performed accordingly, and the player performs technical intervention. Since it is possible to make the game state advantageous to the player for the first time, the interest of the game can be improved.

  RT (9) continues after either CB (1) or CB (2) wins until the winning CB wins, but the stop order notification is executed during the assist time. After the assist time is over, stop order notification is not executed even at RT (9), and technical intervention by the player is virtually impossible, and an increase in medals cannot be expected. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to win the winning CB immediately after the assist time is over.

  In this embodiment, when the small roles GR (1) to (12) are won in the normal gaming state and SB, only one game is transferred to the SB having a higher medal payout rate than the normal gaming state. ) To (12) win simultaneously, so that even though the small roles GR (1) to (12) won, the SBs (1) to (12) cannot be won and medals cannot be obtained. Since winning a prize and gaining profits from SB, it is possible to reduce a player's loss caused by dropping 15 (1) to (12) and 15 (A) to (C).

  Further, although SB has a higher medal payout rate than the normal gaming state, the expected payout value is obtained by winning 15 (1) to (12) and 15 (A) to (C). Since the number of medals is smaller than the number of medals, the small role GR (1) to (12) is won, and the player guesses the selected small role GR, and as a result, 15 (1) to (12) or 15 (A ) ~ (C) wins more medals than when SB (1) ~ (12) wins, so the guessed small role GR hits the player when winning Can be further enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state and SB, any one of the small roles GR (1) to (12) and SB (1) to (12) is always won at the same time, and the small roles GR (1) to ( 12) or SB (1) to (12) will not win alone, but if either of the small roles GR (1) to (12) and SB (1) to (12) will always win simultaneously In addition, the small roles GR (1) to (12) or SB (1) to (12) may be won alone.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the small roles GR (1) to (12) are won in the normal gaming state or SB, 15 (1) to (12), 15 ( In the state where the pull-in of A) to (C) is restricted and any CB is won and carried over, that is, during RT (9), SB is not subject to internal lottery. Therefore, when the small roles GR (1) to (12) are won in the normal gaming state or SB, 15 (1) to (12), 15 (A) to (C) By restricting the withdrawal, the winning probability of 15 (1) to (12) and 15 (A) to (C) in the normal gaming state, that is, the medal payout rate is reduced, and 15 (1 ) To (12), 15 (A) to (C) can be relatively increased in medal payout rate in RT (9) without restriction. On the other hand, in RT (9), 15 sheets (1) to (12) and 15 sheets (A) to (C) are awarded, even if the stop operation is not performed in the troublesome operation procedure of daringly avoiding SB. Is possible.

  As described above, the fourth embodiment of the present invention has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the fourth embodiment, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Moreover, about the structure which is the same as that of Examples 1-3, or similar, it has an effect similar to what was demonstrated in Examples 1-3. Moreover, the modification illustrated about Examples 1-3 is applicable to Example 4. FIG.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 32L, 32C, 32R Reel motor 34 Hopper unit 35 Overflow tank 35a Full tank sensor 41 Main controller 41a CPU
41b ROM
41c RAM
91 Sub-control unit 91a CPU
91b ROM
91c RAM

Claims (1)

A variable display device capable of deriving a display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable,
With the game can be started by setting the bet number of the predetermined number for a game using the value for a game, one game by the display result on all of the plurality of variable display area Ru is derived A slot machine that is capable of generating a winning according to a combination of symbols on a predetermined winning line among the display results derived to each of the plurality of variable display areas as a result of one game,
And pre-determining means for determining whether or not to permit the generation for a plurality of types of prize before the display result is derived in the variable display area,
A derivation operation means which is operated when leading out the display result to the variable display area,
Derivation control means for performing control to derive the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated;
With
The determination result of the prior determination means is
A first specific result for simultaneously determining whether the first winning is permitted and the second winning is permitted;
A second specific result for simultaneously determining whether to allow the occurrence of the first prize and to allow the occurrence of the third prize;
Including
The derivation control means includes
First corresponding to a particular variable display area in a state where the determination result of when a first identification result, have not yet been derived the plurality of variable display to both the display results of area the predetermination means when deriving operating means for is operated, after the symbols constituting a first combination for generating the first prize was derived on the predetermined pay line, yet display result is derived Regardless of the timing at which the derivation operation means corresponding to a non-variable display area is operated, the first combination is derived on the predetermined pay line, while the display result is still derived in any of the variable display areas. the first time derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area other than the specific variable display area in non state is operated, the second combination for generating the second prize Deriving a symbol after the symbol of formed is led onto the predetermined winning line, the timing of deriving operating means is operated corresponding to the variable display area not yet displayed results are derived constitute the second combination If the timing is possible, the second combination is derived on the predetermined winning line, and any symbol other than the timing at which the symbols constituting the second combination can be derived is not generated. A combination is derived on the predetermined winning line;
When the determination result of said predetermination means becomes the second specific results, yet initially to the specific variable display area in a state that is not also derived displays results in any of said plurality of variable display area when the corresponding derivation operation means is operated, corresponding to the after the symbols constituting a first combination was derived on the predetermined pay line, variable display area not yet displayed result is derived derived Regardless of the timing at which the operating means is operated, the first combination is derived on the predetermined pay line, while the display result is not yet derived in any of the variable display areas, the identification is first performed. variable when the display deriving operation means corresponding to the variable display area other than the area is operated, the symbol constructing the third combination of for generating the third prize of the predetermined After derived on prize line, if still displays the results timing derivable deriving timing operating means has been operated the symbol constructing the third combination of corresponding to the variable display area which is not derived the If the third combination is derived on the predetermined winning line, and the symbol constituting the third combination is a timing other than the timing at which the symbol can be derived, a combination of symbols that does not generate any winning is the predetermined winning line. Derived above,
The timing at which the symbol constituting the second combination can be derived is different from the timing at which the symbol constituting the third combination can be derived,
The slot machine has an operation mode for deriving the first combination of the first combination or the second combination when the determination result of the predetermination means becomes the first specific result. An operation mode in which notification is possible and the first combination or the third combination is derived from the first combination even when the determination result of the prior determination unit becomes the second specific result. The slot machine further comprising an operation mode notifying unit capable of notifying the user .

Images